FCC ID: N7N-MC5720 Express Mini-PCI USB Wireless CDMA Modem Module

 

ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice First Edition (August 2005) Copyright Lenovo 2005. Portions Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005. All rights reserved. U.S. GOVERNMENT USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS: Our products and/or services are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the GSA ADP Schedule contract with Lenovo Group Limited, if any, or the standard terms of this commercial license, or if the agency is unable to accept this Program under these terms, then we provide this Program under the provisions set forth in Commercial Computer SoftwareRestricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, when applicable, or under Rights in Data-General, FAR 52.227.14

(Alternate III). Contents Read first regulatory information . USA Federal Communications

. Commission (FCC) . Canada Industry Canada (IC)

. 1

. 3

. 9 Electronic emission notices . Telecommunication notices

. Industry Canada requirements

. 13

. 15

. 17

. Other countries

. Notice for users in Australia

. Notice for users in Brazil . Notice for users in India . Notice for users in Indonesia Notice for users in Korea . Notice for users in New Zealand Notice for users in Singapore

. Trademarks . 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 20

. 20

. 20

. 21

. 23 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. iii iv ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Read first regulatory information Regulatory notice for ThinkPad Z60t Series This notice is a supplementary document of the ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide. Please read this document before you use the ThinkPad Z60t Series computer. The ThinkPad Z60t Series computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your ThinkPad computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. Avis de rglementation pour les ThinkPad Z60t Series Le prsent avis est un document qui vient complter le ThinkPad Z60t et Z60m Series - Guide de maintenance et didentification des incidents. Veuillez lire ce document avant dutiliser lordinateur ThinkPad Z60t Series. Lordinateur ThinkPad Z60t Series est conforme aux normes de scurit et de radiofrquence du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est agre. Vous devez installer et utiliser votre ordinateur ThinkPad en respectant scrupuleusement les instructions dcrites ci-aprs. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 1 2 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. User installable Wireless LAN module Mini PCI Express Card v FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB6 (Model: AR5BXB6) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). i) FCC ID of wireless module There is no FCC ID for Mini PCI Express Card shown on the enclosure of your ThinkPad computer. Instead you will find an indicator pointing to the location of the FCC ID on the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer as shown in the figure below. The FCC ID is affixed on the approved module installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot. Model: AR5BXB6 ii) Installation of approved wireless module If no integrated wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one, provided by Lenovo as an option. Plug the wireless card option into the Mini PCI Express Card slot located under the keyboard of your ThinkPad computer as shown below. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 3 Attention: The ThinkPad Z60t Series computer contains an authentication mechanism If you install an unauthorized wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card that is not approved for use in the ThinkPad Z60t Series computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. iii) The FCC RF safety requirement The radiated output power of the Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card authorized to use for the ThinkPad Z60t Series computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the ThinkPad Z60t Series computer shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

Caution: To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna for the integrated Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card built in to the screen section and all persons. You are not allowed to disable standby mode for the power management function, if you cannot maintain the sufficient antenna separation

(at least 20 cm) in any case the LCD is left opened or closed. 4 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Model: AR5BXB6 Note: The transmission diversity function is implemented for the card. The function does not emit radio frequencies simultaneously from both antennas. One of the antennas is selected automatically or manually (by users) to have good quality of radiocommunication. iv) Radio Frequency interference requirements v This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B, and is subject to DoC. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 13. v This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. v High power radar are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. II. Pre-installed integrated Bluetooth module v FCC ID: MCLJ07H081 (Model: J07H081) The device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for both a Class B digital device regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart B and an intentional radiator regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart C. The FCC ID includes both certifications of Part 15 Subpart B and C. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 5 i) FCC ID and installation of the module If you find the FCC ID MCLJ07H081 on the label at the bottom side of your computer, your computer integrates the Bluetooth transmitter module (Model: J07H081). The Bluetooth module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. If your card requires replacement via the proper steps shown in Chapter 3. Getting help and service of the ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide, Lenovo will request you to send your computer with the card to Lenovo so that Lenovo will repair it. ii) The FCC RF safety requirement The Bluetooth module J07H081 and its built-in antenna are located near the left hinge of the computer lid. The radiated output power of the Bluetooth module is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Therefore, a 20 cm of separation between the Bluetooth antenna and human body is not required. Bluetooth module and built-in antenna III. Pre-installed integrated Wireless WAN adapter v FCC ID: N7N-MC5720 (Model: MC5720) i) FCC ID and installation of the module If you find the FCC ID N7N-MC5720 on the label at the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer, your computer integrates the Wireless WAN (EVDO) transmitter module (Model: MC5720). The Wireless WAN module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. If your card requires replacement via the proper steps shown in Chapter 3. Getting help and service of the ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide, Lenovo will request you to send your computer with the card to Lenovo so that Lenovo will repair it. 6 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice ii) RF safety compliance The transmission antenna used for the Wireless WAN (EVDO) adapter in this notebook computer is located at the lower right portion of the LCD screen. The total radiated energy from all the antennas connected to the Wireless WAN adapter (Model: MC5720), the Wireless LAN Mini PCI express adapter

(Model: AR5BXB6), and the Bluetooth module (Model: J07H081) conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate) requirement regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093. The maximum SAR values measured for the ThinkPad Z60t Series computer were x.xxxW/Kg at 800MHz band and x.xxxW/Kg at 1.9GHz band. (The limit is 1.6W/Kg.) Model: MC5720 iii) Emergency Calls The EVDO modules embedded in the ThinkPad Z60t Series do not support voice calls, hence their use for essential communication is not possible, including emergency calls regarding the E911 rule. iv) Radio Frequency interference requirements This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B, and is subject to DoC. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 13. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 7 IV. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your ThinkPad computer is approved for simultaneous use of the three transmitters listed below:

v Wireless WAN EVDO adapter (FCC ID: N7N-MC5720) v Wireless LAN adapter (FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB6) v Bluetooth module (FCC ID: MCLJ07H081) Please make sure of the following conditions on use of these wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all other wireless features including the above integrated devices in your ThinkPad computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option devices users manual. 8 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number User installable Wireless LAN module v IC: 4105A-AR5BXB6 (Model: AR5BXB6) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). The certification number of Industry Canada for the approved Mini PCI Express wireless card is affixed on the module installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot as shown below. Attention: The ThinkPad Z60t Series computer contains an authentication mechanism You can install or remove each wireless feature by yourself. If you install an unauthorized wireless adapter that is not approved for use in the ThinkPad Z60t Series computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 9 Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210) Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. When you use the model AR5BXB6:

v The device for the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. v High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN

(Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) ThinkPad Z60t Series computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb Numro dhomologation IC Module sans fil installable par lutilisateur Carte Express mini-PCI de rseau local sans fil:

v IC : 4105A-AR5BXB6 (Modle : AR5BXB6, carte Express mini-PCI de rseau local sans fil ThinkPad 11a/b/g) Les cartes de rseau local sans fil Express mini-PCI commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. Le numro dhomologation dIndustrie Canada pour la carte sans fil Express mini-PCI homologue est indiqu sur le module install dans lemplacement rserv la carte Express mini-PCI, comme illustr ci-dessous. 10 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Attention: Lordinateur ThinkPad Z60t Series contient un mcanisme dauthentification. Vous pouvez installer ou dsinstaller tout dispositif sans fil. Si vous installez une carte sans fil qui nest pas homologue pour lordinateur ThinkPad Z60t Series, lordinateur ne dmarrera pas; un message derreur sera affich et des bips sonores seront mis. Remarque relative aux appareils de communication radio de faible puissance sans licence

(CNR-210) Le fonctionnement de ce type dappareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio, et 2. cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Lorsque vous utilisez le modle AR5BXB6 :

v Tout appareil destin la bande 5150-5250 MHz devra tre exclusivement utilis en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. v Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (cest--dire quils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LELAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. Exposition des tres humains aux champs radiolectriques (RF) (CNR-102) Le ThinkPad Z60t Series utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui nmettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par le Ministre de la sant canadien pour la population. Consultez le Safety Code 6 sur le site Web du Ministre de la sant canadien ladresse www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. Canada Industry Canada (IC) 11 12 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement v Model: AR5BXB6 v Model: MC5720 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

v Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. v v Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. v Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Inc. One Manhattanville Road Purchase, New York 10577 Telephone: (919) 254-0532 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 13 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 14 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Telecommunication notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Telephone Company Requirements (Part 68 of the FCC Rules) 1. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. In order to program this information into your computer, you should be sure to follow the installation instructions for your fax software package. 2. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. 3. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). If the built-in modem causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But, if advance notice isnt practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. 4. 5. Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the proper operation of your equipment. If they do, you will be given advance notice so as to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service. If you experience trouble with this built-in modem, contact your Lenovo Authorized Seller, or the Customer Support Center. For the most current phone numbers, go to http://www.lenovo.com/think/support and click Support phone list. The telephone company may ask you to disconnect 6. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 15 this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected, or until you are sure the equipment is not malfunctioning. 7. No customer repairs are possible to the modem. If you experience trouble with this equipment, contact your Lenovo Authorized Seller, or the Customer Support Center. For the most current phone numbers, go to http://www.lenovo.com/think/support and click Support phone list. 8. The modem may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission or corporation commission for information. 9. When ordering network interface (NI) service from the Local Exchange Carrier, specify service arrangement USOC RJ11C. 10. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this Data/Fax Modem does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. 11. 12. The software contained in this Data/Fax Modem to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. 16 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Industry Canada requirements Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of communication. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs of alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for the terminal equipment RD02-D110 is 0.1. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 17 Avis Le prsent matriel est conforme aux spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada applicables au matriel terminal. Cette conformit est confirme par le numro denregistrement. Le sigle IC, plac devant le numro denregistrement, signifie que lenregistrement sest effectu conformment une dclaration de conformit et indique que les spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada ont t respectes. Il nimplique pas quIndustrie Canada a approuv le matriel. Avant dinstaller ce matriel, lutilisateur doit sassurer quil est permis de le raccorder aux installations de lentreprise locale de tlcommunication. Le matriel doit galement tre install en suivant une mthode accepte de raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intrieurs de lentreprise utiliss pour un service individuel ligne unique peuvent tre prolongs au moyen dun dispositif homologu de raccordement (cordon prolongateur tlphonique interne). Labonn ne doit pas oublier quil est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonces ci-dessus nempechent pas la dgradation du service dans certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de tlcommunication ne permettent pas que lon raccorde leur matriel des jacks dabonn, sauf dans les cas prcis prvus par les tarifs paticuliers de ces entreprises. Les rparations de matriel homologu doivent tre effectues par un centre dentretien canadien autoris dsign par le fournisseur. La compagnie de tlcommunications peut demander lutilisateur de dbrancher un appareil la suite de rparations ou de modifications effectues par lutilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour sa propre protection, lutilisateur doit sassurer que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source dnergie lectrique, des lignes tlphoniques et des canalisations deau mtalliques, sil y en a, sont raccords ensemble. Cette prcaution est particulirement importante dans les rgions rurales. Avertissement Lutilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-mme; il doit avoir recours un service dinspection des installations lectriques, ou lectricien, selon le cas. Lindice dquivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du prsent matriel RD02-D110 est de 0.1. LIES assign chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccords une interface tlphonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme dindices dquivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcde pas 5. 18 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Other countries Notice for users in Australia For model: RD02-D110 The following notice applies when using the telephony functions:

WARNING: FOR SAFETY REASONS, ONLY CONNECT EQUIPMENT WITH A TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPLIANCE LABEL. THIS INCLUDES CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT PREVIOUSLY LABELLED PERMITTED OR CERTIFIED. Notice for users in Brazil For model: AR5BXB6 Portuguese English Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio This equipment is a secondary type device, that is, it is not protected against harmful interference, even if the interference is caused by a device of the same type, and it also cannot cause any interference to primary type devices. Notice for users in India For model: J07H081 The equipment type approval does not imply that the frequencies will be cleared automatically/operating licence will be granted as these are matters to be examined on case by case basis on the receipt of the application to WPC. For model: AR5BXB6 The AR5BXB6 equipment is typed approved in India for use of the IEEE 802.11b mode only in indoor applications. All other types of usages require specific wireless license from Wireless Planning & Coordination (WPC) Wing of Ministry of Communications and Information Technology of India. Before using the model AR5BXB6, you must configure the device driver of your ThinkPad computer for 802.11b only operation. To disable 802.11g. follow the procedure below:

1. On your desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 19 2. Click the Hardware tab; then click the Device Manager button. 3. In the device list, expand Network Adapters, and then double-click ThinkPad 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Adapter. 4. Click the Advanced tab. Then, from the Property list, select Wireless Mode . 5. Clear Use default value; from the drop-down box, select 802.11b only. 6. Click OK. Notice for users in Indonesia For model: AR5BXB6 Users in Indonesia must never configure any channels in the 5Ghz band, it is strictly forbidden. Due to this restriction, users must only select any channels on 2.4 Ghz 11Mbps (802.11b) or 2.4Ghz 54 Mbps (802.11g) wireless mode when configuring their Profile Management with Lenovo Access Connections program (in any Infrastructure or Adhoc Mode). Notice for users in Korea For model: RD02-D110 Please note that this device has been certified for residential use and may be used in any environment. For models: J07H081 and AR5BXB6 Please note that this device has been certified for residential use and may be used in any environment. Notice for users in New Zealand Conexant RD02-D110 modem : Telepermit N PTC 211/04/017 The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. 20 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom accepts no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. This warning typically applies to 56 kbit/s modems. This equipment shall not be used in a manner that could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms specifications:

v Automatic re-attempts to the same number : There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt. v Automatic calls to different numbers : Calls shall be spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another. Notice for users in Singapore For models: J07H081 and AR5BXB6 OPERATING CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE RADIOCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ARE EXEMPTED FROM LICENSING To maximize frequency sharing while minimizing radio interference, the following operating conditions are imposed to confine the propagation of radio signals within a building or at a localised site:

a) The radiocommunication equipment shall be used for in-building or localised on-site operations;

b) The radiocommunication equipment shall operate at frequencies or frequency bands designated by IDA on non-exclusive basis;

c) The radiocommunication equipment shall not operate beyond the maximum permissible output power designated by IDA to confine the propagation of radio signals to a small localised area;

d) For an on-site localised operation with little obstruction by the nearby buildings or terrain, height of any external antenna, if installation approved by IDA, shall not be more than 10 metres above ground level to limit the radio wave propagation; and e) No repeater station shall be used to extend the radio coverage. Other countries 21 22 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo ThinkPad IBM is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both, and is used under license. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 23 24 ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice Part Number: 39T6059 Printed in China

(1P) P/N: 39T6059

 

 

ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice First Edition (August 2005) Copyright Lenovo 2005. Portions Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005. All rights reserved. U.S. GOVERNMENT USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS: Our products and/or services are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the GSA ADP Schedule contract with Lenovo Group Limited, if any, or the standard terms of this commercial license, or if the agency is unable to accept this Program under these terms, then we provide this Program under the provisions set forth in Commercial Computer SoftwareRestricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, when applicable, or under Rights in Data-General, FAR 52.227.14

(Alternate III). Contents Read first regulatory information . USA Federal Communications

. Commission (FCC) . Canada Industry Canada (IC)

. 1

. 3

. 9 Electronic emission notices . Telecommunication notices

. Industry Canada requirements

. 13

. 15

. 17

. Other countries

. Notice for users in Australia

. Notice for users in Brazil . Notice for users in India . Notice for users in Indonesia Notice for users in Korea . Notice for users in New Zealand Notice for users in Singapore

. Trademarks . 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 20

. 21

. 21

. 22

. 23 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. iii iv ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Read first regulatory information Regulatory notice for ThinkPad Z60m Series This notice is a supplementary document of the ThinkPadZ60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide. Please read this document before you use the ThinkPad Z60m Series computer. The ThinkPad Z60m Series computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your ThinkPad computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. Avis de rglementation pour les ThinkPad Z60m Series Le prsent avis est un document qui vient complter le ThinkPad Z60t et Z60m Series - Guide de maintenance et didentification des incidents. Veuillez lire ce document avant dutiliser lordinateur ThinkPad Z60m Series. Lordinateur ThinkPad Z60m Series est conforme aux normes de scurit et de radiofrquence du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est agre. Vous devez installer et utiliser votre ordinateur ThinkPad en respectant scrupuleusement les instructions dcrites ci-aprs. Z60m Z60m Z60m Z60m Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 1 2 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. User installable Wireless LAN modules Mini-PCI Cards:

v FCC ID: S2L20040501CX2, Model: WM3B2200BG (Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Mini-PCI Adapter) v FCC ID: S2L20040601CX2, Model: WM3B2915ABG (Intel Pro/Wireless 2915ABG mini-PCI Adapter) v FCC ID: S2L20040600BTL, Model: AR5BMB-44 (ThinkPad 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter II) Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). i) FCC ID of wireless modules There is no FCC ID for Mini-PCI Cards shown on the enclosure of your ThinkPad computer. Instead you will find an indicator pointing to the location of the FCC ID on the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer as shown below. The FCC IDs are affixed on each approved module installed in the Mini-PCI Card slot. FCC ID: S2L20040501CX2, Model: WM3B2200BG FCC ID: S2L20040601CX2, Model: WM3B2915ABG FCC ID: S2L20040600BTL, Model: AR5BMB-44 ii) Installation of approved wireless modules Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 3 If no integrated wireless LAN Mini-PCI Card has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one, provided by Lenovo as an option. Plug the wireless card option into the Mini-PCI Card slot located under the keyboard of your ThinkPad computer as shown below. Removable Palmrest Removable Keyboard Modem Daughter Card slot Mini-PCI Card slot Attention: The ThinkPad Z60m Series computer contains an authentication mechanism If you install an unauthorized wireless LAN Mini-PCI Card that is not approved for use in the ThinkPad Z60m Series computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. iii) The FCC RF safety requirement The radiated output power of the Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Cards authorized to use for the ThinkPad Z60m Series computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the ThinkPad Z60m Series computer shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

Caution: To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna for the integrated Wireless LAN Mini PCI Card built in to the screen section and all persons. You are not allowed to disable standby mode for the power management function, if you cannot maintain the sufficient antenna separation (at least 20 cm) in any case the LCD is left opened or closed. FCC ID: S2L20040501CX2, Model: WM3B2200BG FCC ID: S2L20040601CX2, Model: WM3B2915ABG FCC ID: S2L20040600BTL, Model: AR5BMB-44 4 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Note: The transmission diversity function is implemented for the models: WM3B2200BG, WM3B2915ABG, and AR5BMB-44. The function does not emit radio frequencies simultaneously from both antennas. One of the antennas is selected automatically or manually (by users) to have good quality of radiocommunication. iv) Radio Frequency interference requirements v The devices (Models: WM3B2200BG, WM3B2915ABG, and AR5BMB-44) have been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital devices pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B, and are subject to DoC (Declaration of Conformity). Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 13. When you use the models WM3B2915ABG or AR5BMB-44:

v These devices are restricted to indoor use due to their operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires these products to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. v High power radar are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage these devices. II. Pre-installed integrated Bluetooth module v FCC ID: MCLJ07H081, Model: J07H081 (ThinkPad Bluetooth with Enhanced Data Rate) The device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for both a Class B digital device regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart B and an intentional radiator regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart C. The FCC ID includes both certifications of Part 15 Subpart B and C. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 5 i) FCC ID and installation of the module If you find the FCC ID MCLJ07H081 on the label at the bottom side of your computer, your computer integrates the Bluetooth transmitter module (Model: J07H081). The Bluetooth module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. If your card requires replacement via the proper steps shown in Chapter 3. Getting help and service of the ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide, Lenovo will request you to send your computer with the card to Lenovo so that Lenovo will repair it. ii) The FCC RF safety requirement The Bluetooth module J07H081 and its built-in antenna are located near the left hinge of the computer lid. The radiated output power of the Bluetooth module is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Therefore, a 20 cm of separation between the Bluetooth antenna and human body is not required. III. Pre-installed integrated Wireless WAN adapter v FCC ID: N7N-MC5720 (Model: MC5720) 6 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice i) FCC ID and installation of the module If you find the FCC ID N7N-MC5720 on the label at the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer, your computer integrates the Wireless WAN (EVDO) transmitter module (Model: MC5720). The Wireless WAN module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. If your card requires replacement via the proper steps shown in Chapter 3. Getting help and service of the ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide, Lenovo will request you to send your computer with the card to Lenovo so that Lenovo will repair it. ii) RF safety compliance The transmission antenna used for the Wireless WAN (EVDO) adapter in this notebook computer is located at the lower-right portion of the LCD screen. The total radiated energy from all the antennas connected to the Wireless WAN adapter (Model: MC5720), the Bluetooth module (Model: J07H081), and one of the Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Cards (models: WM3B2200BG, WM3B2915ABG, or AR5BMB-44) conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093. Model: MC5720 iii) Emergency Calls The EVDO modules embedded in the ThinkPad Z60m Series do not support voice calls, hence their use for essential communication is not possible, including emergency calls regarding the E911 rule. iv) Radio Frequency interference requirements This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B, and is subject to DoC (Declaration of Conformity). Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 13. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 7 IV. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your ThinkPad computer is approved for simultaneous use of the three transmitters listed below:

v Wireless WAN EVDO adapter (FCC ID: N7N-MC5720) v one of the Wireless LAN adapters (FCC ID: S2L20040501CX2, S2L20040601CX2, or S2L20040600BTL) v Bluetooth module (FCC ID: MCLJ07H081) Please make sure of the following conditions on use of these wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all other wireless features including the above integrated devices in your ThinkPad computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option devices users manual. 8 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number User installable Wireless LAN modules v v v IC: 5903D-WM3B22BG, Model: WM3B2200BG (Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Mini-PCI Adapter) IC: 5903D-WM3B29AG, Model: WM3B2915ABG (Intel Pro/Wireless 2915ABG mini-PCI Adapter) IC: 5903D-AR5BMB44, Model: AR5BMB-44 (ThinkPad 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter II) Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). The certification number of Industry Canada for each approved Wireless Mini-PCI card is affixed on each module installed in the Mini-PCI Card slot as shown below. Removable Palmrest Removable Keyboard Modem Daughter Card slot Attention: The ThinkPad Z60m Series computer contains an authentication mechanism You can install or remove each wireless feature by yourself. If you install an unauthorized wireless adapter that is not approved for use in the ThinkPad Z60m Series computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. Mini-PCI Card slot Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 9 Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210) Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. When you use the models AR5BMB-44 (ThinkPad 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter II) or WM3B2915ABG (Intel Pro/Wireless 2915ABG mini-PCI Adapter):

v The device for the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. v High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN

(Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) ThinkPad Z60m Series computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb Numro dhomologation IC Les cartes sans fil applicables sont les suivantes:

v v v IC: 5903D-WM3B22BG, Model: WM3B2200BG (Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Mini-PCI Adapter) IC: 5903D-WM3B29AG, Model: WM3B2915ABG (Intel Pro/Wireless 2915ABG mini-PCI Adapter) IC: 5903D-AR5BMB44, Model: AR5BMB-44 (ThinkPad 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter II) Les cartes de rseau local sans fil mini-PCI commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. Le numro dhomologation dIndustrie Canada pour chaque carte Mini-PCI sans fil homologue est indiqu sur chaque module install dans lemplacement Mini-PCI Card comme illustr ci-dessous. 10 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Removable Palmrest Removable Keyboard Modem Daughter Card slot Mini-PCI Card slot Attention: Lordinateur ThinkPad Z60m Series contient un mcanisme dauthentification. Vous pouvez installer ou dsinstaller tout dispositif sans fil. Si vous installez une carte sans fil qui nest pas homologue pour lordinateur ThinkPad Z60m Series, lordinateur ne dmarrera pas; un message derreur sera affich et des bips sonores seront mis. Remarque relative aux appareils de communication radio de faible puissance sans licence

(CNR-210) Le fonctionnement de ce type dappareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio, et 2. cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Lorsque vous utilisez les modles AR5BMB-44 (ThinkPad 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter II) ou WM3B2915ABG (Intel Pro/Wireless 2915ABG mini-PCI Adapter):

v Tout appareil destin la bande 5150-5250 MHz devra tre exclusivement utilis en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. v Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (cest--dire quils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LELAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. Exposition des tres humains aux champs radiolectriques (RF) (CNR-102) Le ThinkPad Z60m Series utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui nmettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par le Ministre de la sant canadien pour la population. Consultez le Safety Code 6 sur le site Web du Ministre de la sant canadien ladresse www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. Canada Industry Canada (IC) 11 12 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Electronic emission notices Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Mini-PCI Adapter Intel Pro/Wireless 2915ABG mini-PCI Adapter Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement v v v ThinkPad 11a/b/g Wireless LAN Mini PCI Adapter II v ThinkPad Wireless WAN EVDO Adapter This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

v Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. v v Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. v Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Inc. One Manhattanville Road Purchase, New York 10577 Telephone: (919) 254-0532 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 13 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 14 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Telecommunication notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Telephone Company Requirements (Part 68 of the FCC Rules) 1. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. In order to program this information into your computer, you should be sure to follow the installation instructions for your fax software package. 2. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. 3. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). If the built-in modem causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But, if advance notice isnt practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. 4. 5. Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the proper operation of your equipment. If they do, you will be given advance notice so as to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service. If you experience trouble with this built-in modem, contact your Lenovo Authorized Seller, or the Customer Support Center. For the most current phone numbers, go to http://www.lenovo.com/think/support and click Support phone list. The telephone company may ask you to disconnect 6. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 15 this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected, or until you are sure the equipment is not malfunctioning. 7. No customer repairs are possible to the modem. If you experience trouble with this equipment, contact your Lenovo Authorized Seller, or the Customer Support Center. For the most current phone numbers, go to http://www.lenovo.com/think/support and click Support phone list. 8. The modem may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission or corporation commission for information. 9. When ordering network interface (NI) service from the Local Exchange Carrier, specify service arrangement USOC RJ11C. 10. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this Data/Fax Modem does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. 11. 12. The software contained in this Data/Fax Modem to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. 16 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Industry Canada requirements Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of communication. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs of alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for the terminal equipment RD02-D110 is 0.1. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 17 Avis Le prsent matriel est conforme aux spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada applicables au matriel terminal. Cette conformit est confirme par le numro denregistrement. Le sigle IC, plac devant le numro denregistrement, signifie que lenregistrement sest effectu conformment une dclaration de conformit et indique que les spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada ont t respectes. Il nimplique pas quIndustrie Canada a approuv le matriel. Avant dinstaller ce matriel, lutilisateur doit sassurer quil est permis de le raccorder aux installations de lentreprise locale de tlcommunication. Le matriel doit galement tre install en suivant une mthode accepte de raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intrieurs de lentreprise utiliss pour un service individuel ligne unique peuvent tre prolongs au moyen dun dispositif homologu de raccordement (cordon prolongateur tlphonique interne). Labonn ne doit pas oublier quil est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonces ci-dessus nempechent pas la dgradation du service dans certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de tlcommunication ne permettent pas que lon raccorde leur matriel des jacks dabonn, sauf dans les cas prcis prvus par les tarifs paticuliers de ces entreprises. Les rparations de matriel homologu doivent tre effectues par un centre dentretien canadien autoris dsign par le fournisseur. La compagnie de tlcommunications peut demander lutilisateur de dbrancher un appareil la suite de rparations ou de modifications effectues par lutilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour sa propre protection, lutilisateur doit sassurer que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source dnergie lectrique, des lignes tlphoniques et des canalisations deau mtalliques, sil y en a, sont raccords ensemble. Cette prcaution est particulirement importante dans les rgions rurales. Avertissement Lutilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-mme; il doit avoir recours un service dinspection des installations lectriques, ou lectricien, selon le cas. Lindice dquivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du prsent matriel RD02-D110 est de 0.1. LIES assign chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccords une interface tlphonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme dindices dquivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcde pas 5. 18 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Other countries Notice for users in Australia For model: RD02-D110 The following notice applies when using the telephony functions:

WARNING: FOR SAFETY REASONS, ONLY CONNECT EQUIPMENT WITH A TELECOMMUNICATIONS COMPLIANCE LABEL. THIS INCLUDES CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT PREVIOUSLY LABELLED PERMITTED OR CERTIFIED. Notice for users in Brazil For models: WM3B2200BG, WM3B2915ABG and AR5BMB-44 Portuguese English Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio This equipment is a secondary type device, that is, it is not protected against harmful interference, even if the interference is caused by a device of the same type, and it also cannot cause any interference to primary type devices. Notice for users in India For model: J07H081 The equipment type approval does not imply that the frequencies will be cleared automatically/operating licence will be granted as these are matters to be examined on case by case basis on the receipt of the application to WPC. For model: WM3B2915ABG The WM3B2915ABG equipment is typed approved in India for use of the IEEE 802.11b mode only in indoor applications. All other types of usages require specific wireless license from Wireless Planning & Coordination (WPC) Wing of Ministry of Communications and Information Technology of India. Before using the model WM3B2915ABG, you must configure the device driver of your ThinkPad computer for 802.11b only operation. To disable 802.11g. follow the procedure below:

1. On your desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 19 2. Click the Hardware tab; then click the Device Manager button. 3. In the device list, expand Network Adapters, and then double-click Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection. 4. Click the Advanced tab. Then, from the Property list, select Wireless Mode . 5. Clear Use default value; from the drop-down box, select 802.11b only. 6. Click OK. Notice for users in Indonesia For models: AR5BMB-44 and WM3B2915ABG Users in Indonesia must never configure any channels in the 5Ghz band, it is strictly forbidden. Due to this restriction, users must only select any channels on 2.4 Ghz 11Mbps (802.11b) or 2.4Ghz 54 Mbps (802.11g) Wireless mode when configuring their Profile Management with Access Connections program

(in any Infrastructure or Adhoc Mode). For model: WM3B2915ABG Indonesia does not grant regulatory approvals for 802.11a and mandates 802.11b/g only usage. The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG adapter complies with this mandate through an 802.11b/g only configuration in the device driver. This configuration is acceptable to the Indonesian regulatory authority who will allow notebook vendors to sell the 2915ABG adapter in Indonesia provided that the notebook vendors alert their customers in writing of their obligation to configure the device driver for 802.11b/g only operation prior to use of the notebook product. This document describes the method for configuring the device driver for 802.11b/g only operation, and includes the Indonesia regulatory approval label. 1. On your desktop, right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties. 2. Click the Hardware tab; then click the Device Manager button. 3. In the device list, expand Network Adapters; then double-click Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection. 4. Click the Advanced tab. Then, from the Property list, select Wireless Mode . 5. Clear Use default value; from the drop-down box, select 802.11b and 802.11g. 6. Click OK. 20 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Notice for users in Korea For model: RD02-D110 Please note that this device has been certified for residential use and may be used in any environment. For models: J07H081, WM3B2200BG, WM3B2915ABG AR5BMB-44 Please note that this device has been certified for residential use and may be used in any environment. Notice for users in New Zealand Conexant RD02-D110 modem : Telepermit N PTC 211/04/017 The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom accepts no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. This warning typically applies to 56 kbit/s modems. This equipment shall not be used in a manner that could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms specifications:

v Automatic re-attempts to the same number: There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt. Other countries 21 v Automatic calls to different numbers: Calls shall be spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another. Notice for users in Singapore For models: J07H081, WM3B2200BG, WM3B2915ABG, AR5BMB-44 OPERATING CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE RADIOCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ARE EXEMPTED FROM LICENSING To maximize frequency sharing while minimizing radio interference, the following operating conditions are imposed to confine the propagation of radio signals within a building or at a localised site:

a) The radiocommunication equipment shall be used for in-building or localised on-site operations;

b) The radiocommunication equipment shall operate at frequencies or frequency bands designated by IDA on non-exclusive basis;

c) The radiocommunication equipment shall not operate beyond the maximum permissible output power designated by IDA to confine the propagation of radio signals to a small localised area;

d) For an on-site localised operation with little obstruction by the nearby buildings or terrain, height of any external antenna, if installation approved by IDA, shall not be more than 10 metres above ground level to limit the radio wave propagation; and e) No repeater station shall be used to extend the radio coverage. 22 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo ThinkPad IBM is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both, and is used under license. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 23 24 ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice Part Number: 39T6120 Printed in China

(1P) P/N: 39T6120

 

 

434155-001.fm Page 1 Monday, June 26, 2006 11:25 AM HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer with Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone. Your new computer, when used with Built-in 3G broadband service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or just about anywhere.*

Before you can use Built-in 3G broadband from Vodafone (service purchased separately), you must activate service and install the preloaded software. You will be prompted to run the HP Broadband Wireless setup utility when you start the computer. To activate your Vodafone service and install the preloaded software, follow the instructions in the setup utility. To learn more about the benefits of your HP Broadband Wireless computer and Built-in 3G broadband, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/broadbandwireless.

*Subject to coverage availability. Copyright 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. VODAFONE and the Vodafone logos and Vodafone Mobile Connect are trade marks of the Vodafone Group. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trade marks of their respective owners. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2006 PRINTER: Replace this box with Printed- In (PI) Statement(s) as per spec. NOTE: This box is simply a placeholder. PI Statement(s) do not have to fit inside the box but should be placed in this area. 434155-001

 

 

435748-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435748-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435748-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435748-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435748-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435748-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435748-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B7 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435748-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup and Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, click View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Next steps Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. 38 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in Standby or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Standby or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel

> Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (If you have been registered to a domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If you have been registered to a network domain, the button you click will be called Shut Down instead of Turn Off Computer. 44 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My HP Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

My HP Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband (wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection There are 3 basic types of Internet connection:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory software recovery CDs or DVDs to recover the system (Highly recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously back up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backup up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started AppB.fm Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:57 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup and Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the My Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup and Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up individual files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435748-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data files, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly, or monthly) or at specific events, such as system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup and Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup and Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup and Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup and Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Getting Started B7 435748-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Backup and recovery Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup and Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recover important files or the entire system, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter identifying 12 using 15 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435748-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435748-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 slot, SIM 27 modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Getting Started Index3 435748-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 10:17 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 Standby 43 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Standby problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

 

 

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435751-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > My Computer. In the left pane of the System Tasks window, select View system information. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in Standby, press the button briefly to exit Standby. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in Standby. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 country-specific modem cable adapter 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 ENWW mute 4 num lock 4, 6 power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 modem cable 16 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 memory module 14 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 ENWW Index 19

 

 

Notebook Tour User Guide Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435813-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. ENWW iii iv Product notice ENWW Table of contents 1 Identifying Hardware 2 Components Top components ................................................................................................................................... 3 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 3 Lights ................................................................................................................................... 4 Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................ 7 Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Front components .............................................................................................................................. 10 Rear components ............................................................................................................................... 11 Right-side components ....................................................................................................................... 12 Left-side components ......................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom components ........................................................................................................................... 14 Wireless antennae (select models only) ............................................................................................. 15 Additional hardware components ....................................................................................................... 16 3 Labels Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 ENWW v vi ENWW 1 Identifying Hardware To see a list of hardware installed in the computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify device configurations using Device Manager. ENWW 1 2 Components 2 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Top components TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) TouchPad*

Left TouchPad button*

Right TouchPad button*

TouchPad scroll zone*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes factory settings. To view or change pointing device preferences, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Mouse. ENWW Top components 3 Lights NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Caps lock light Num lock light Volume mute light Volume down light Volume up light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Off: Computer sound is on. On: Computer sound is off. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to decrease speaker volume. Blinking: The volume scroll zone is being used to increase speaker volume. 4 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Component

(8) Battery light

(9) Drive light Description Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the internal hard drive.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. ENWW Top components 5 Component

(1) Power lights (2)*

(2) Wireless lights (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Caps lock light Num lock light Battery light Description On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: Caps lock is on. Blinking: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. On: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level.

(6) Drive light Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*The 2 power lights display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open. The power light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. The 2 wireless lights display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open. The wireless light on the front of the computer is visible whether the computer is open or closed. 6 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Buttons, switches, and fingerprint reader NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button Internal display switch Info button Wireless button

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Launches Info Center, which enables you to open various software solutions. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not establish a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. Presentation button Volume mute button Starts the presentation feature. Mutes and restores speaker sound. ENWW Top components 7 Component

(7) Volume scroll zone

(8)

(9) Internal microphone Fingerprint reader Description Adjusts speaker volume. Slide your finger to the left to decrease volume and to the right to increase volume. You can also tap the minus sign on the scroll zone to decrease volume, or tap the plus sign on the scroll zone to increase volume. Records sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Internal display switch Wireless button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button to shut down the computer. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start > Control Panel > System and Maintenance > Power Options. Turns off the display if the display is closed while the power is on. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up in order to establish a wireless connection. 8 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Embedded numeric keypad keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Function keys Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. ENWW Top components 9 Front components Component

(1) Wireless light

(2) Power light

(3) Battery light

(4) Drive light Description On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, the HP Broadband Wireless Module, and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Off: All wireless devices are off. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state. Blinking rapidly: An AC adapter with a higher power rating should be connected. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Amber: A battery is charging. Green: A battery is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light turns off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light stays off until the battery reaches a low battery level. Blinking green: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Amber (select models only): HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive.

(5)

(6) Speakers Display release latch Produce sound. Opens the computer. 10 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Rear components Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(2)

(3)

(4) RJ-45 (network) jack External monitor port Connects a network cable. Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. S-Video-out jack (select models only) Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. ENWW Rear components 11 Right-side components Component Description

(1) Media Card Reader (select models only) Supports the following optional digital card formats: Secure Digital

(SD) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard (MMC), Memory Stick (MS), Memory Stick Pro (MSPro), Memory Stick Duo Adapter, xD-Picture Card (XD).

(2)

(3)

(4) USB ports (2) (select models only) Connect an optional USB device. Optical drive RJ-11 (modem) jack Reads an optical disc. Connects a modem cable. 12 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Left-side components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8) PC Card slot PC Card eject button Power connector Vent USB ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack Audio-in (microphone) jack 1394 port (select models only) Supports optional Type I or Type II 32bit (CardBus) or 16bit PC Cards. Ejects a PC Card from the PC Card slot. Connects an AC adapter. Enables airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connect optional USB devices. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, a headset, or television audio. Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Connects an optional IEEE 1394 or 1394a device, such as a camcorder. ENWW Left-side components 13 Bottom components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) Bluetooth compartment (select models only) Contains a Bluetooth device. Vents Enable airflow to cool internal components. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Accessory battery connector SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional accessory battery. Contains a subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Battery bay Holds the battery. Battery release latches (2) Release the battery from the battery bay. Docking connector (select models only) Connects an optional docking device. Memory module compartment Contains the memory module slot. WLAN module compartment (select models only) Contains a WLAN (wireless local area network) module slot.

(10) Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 14 Chapter 2 Components ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Description

(1)

(2) WLAN antennae (2) (select models only)*

WWAN antenna (select models only)*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLAN). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide-area networks (WWAN).

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. ENWW Wireless antennae (select models only) 15 Additional hardware components Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power cord*

AC adapter Battery*

Modem cable (select models only)*

Country-specific modem cable adapter (select models only)*

Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Converts AC power to DC power. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects the internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack.

*Modem cables, batteries, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 16 Chapter 2 Components ENWW 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product brand and series name, serial number (s/n), and product number (p/n) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity (select models only)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed inside the memory module compartment. Wireless certification label(s) (select models only)Provide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, an HP Broadband Wireless Module, or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the memory module compartment. SIM (subscriber identity module) label (select models only)Provides the ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier) of your SIM. This label is located inside the battery bay. HP Broadband Wireless Module serial number label (select models only)Provides the serial number of your HP Broadband Wireless Module. This label is located inside the battery bay. ENWW 17 Index Symbols/Numerics 1394 port, identifying 13 A AC adapter, identifying 16 accessory battery connector, identifying 14 applications key, Windows 9 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 13 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 13 B battery bay 14, 17 battery light, identifying 5, 6, 10 battery release latch, identifying 14 battery, identifying 16 bays battery 14, 17 hard drive 14 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 14 Bluetooth label 17 buttons info 7 PC Card eject 13 power 7, 8 Presentation 7 TouchPad 3 volume mute 7 wireless 7, 8 C caps lock light, identifying 4, 6 Certificate of Authenticity label 17 compartment memory module 14 WLAN module 14 18 Index components additional hardware 16 bottom 14 front 10 left-side 13 rear 11 right-side 12 top 3 wireless antennae 15 connector, power 13 cord, power 16 D display release latch, identifying 10 display switch, identifying 7 docking connector, identifying 14 drive light, identifying 5, 6, 10 E esc key, identifying 9 external monitor port, identifying 11 F fingerprint reader, identifying 8 fn key, identifying 9 function keys, identifying 9 H hard drive bay, identifying 14 headphone (audio-out) jack 13 HP Broadband Wireless Module label 17 I IEEE 1394 port, identifying 13 info button, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphone, identifying 8 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 13 audio-out (headphone) 13 RJ-11 (modem) 12 RJ-45 (network 11 S-Video-out 11 K keypad keys, identifying 9 keys esc 9 fn 9 function 9 keypad 9 Windows applications 9 Windows logo 9 L labels Bluetooth 17 HP Broadband Wireless Module 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 17 modem approval 17 regulatory 17 service tag 17 SIM 17 wireless certification 17 WLAN 17 latch, battery release 14 lights battery 5, 6, 10 caps lock 4, 6 drive 5, 6, 10 mute 4 num lock 4, 6 ENWW power 4, 6, 10 volume down 4 volume mute 4 volume up 4 wireless 4, 10 M Media Card Reader, identifying 12 memory module compartment, identifying 14 microphone (audio-in) jack 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 modem approval label 17 monitor port, external 11 mute button, identifying 7 mute light, identifying 4 N num lock light, identifying 4, 6 O operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 17 Product Key 17 optical drive, identifying 12 P PC Card eject button, identifying 13 PC Card slot, identifying 13 ports 1394 13 external monitor 11 USB 12, 13 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 13 power cord, identifying 16 power light, identifying 10 power lights, identifying 4, 6 Presentation button, identifying 7 Product Key 17 product name and number, computer 17 R regulatory information modem approval label 17 regulatory label 17 wireless certification labels 17 release latch, battery 14 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 12 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 11 WLAN device 17 WLAN label 17 WLAN module compartment, identifying 14 WWAN antenna, identifying 15 S S-Video-out jack, identifying 11 scrolling regions, TouchPad 3 security cable slot, identifying 11 serial number, computer 17 service tag 17 SIM label 17 SIM slot, identifying 14 slot memory module 14 slots Media Card Reader 12 speaker, identifying 10 T TouchPad buttons 3 identifying 3 scrolling regions 3 traveling with the computer modem approval label 17 wireless certification labels 17 U USB ports, identifying 12, 13 V vent 13 vents, identifying 14 volume down light, identifying 4 volume mute button, identifying 7 volume mute light, identifying 4 volume scroll zone, identifying 8 volume up light, identifying 4 W Windows applications key, identifying 9 Windows logo key, identifying 9 wireless button, identifying 7, 8 wireless certification label 17 wireless light, identifying 4, 10 WLAN antennae, identifying 15 ENWW Index 19

 

 

435816-001.book Page i Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC Document Part Number: 435816-001 March 2007 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Windows. 435816-001.book Page ii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Business Notebook PC First Edition: March 2007 Document Part Number: 435816-001 Product notice This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. 435816-001.book Page iii Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware . 11 Setting up the computer . 13 Step 1: Insert the battery . 14 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 15 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 16 Step 4: Set up the software . 18 Step 5: Create recovery discs (recommended) . 18 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware . 21 Top components . 22 Front components . 23 Left-side components . 24 Right-side components . 25 Rear components . 26 Bottom components. 27 Wireless antennae (select models only). 28 Getting Started iii 435816-001.book Page iv Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents 3 Next steps Protecting the computer . 31 Protecting the computer from viruses . 31 Protecting your system files . 32 Protecting your privacy . 32 Protecting the computer from power surges . 32 Using the computer safely . 33 Connecting to a computer network . 35 Installing additional hardware and software . 36 Identifying and installing hardware. 36 Locating and installing software . 36 Updating the software installed on the computer. 37 Finding the user guides . 38 Turning off the computer correctly . 38 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 41 Quick troubleshooting . 42 The computer is unable to start up. 42 The computer screen is blank . 43 Software is functioning abnormally . 44 The computer is turned on but not responding . 44 The computer is unusually warm. 45 An external device is not working. 46 The WLAN connection is not working . 46 Help and Support . 47 Contacting technical support . 48 A Connect to the Internet from your home Choosing an ISP. A1 Using the New Connection Wizard . A2 Choosing the type of Internet connection . A2 iv Getting Started 435816-001.book Page v Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Contents B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs . B1 Backing up your information . B2 When to back up . B2 Back up suggestions . B3 Backing up specific files or folders . B4 Backing up the entire hard drive . B4 Creating recovery points . B5 Scheduling backups . B6 Performing a recovery . B7 Performing a recovery from the recovery discs. B7 Performing a recovery from the hard drive . B8 C Specifications Operating environment. C1 Rated input power . C2 Index Getting Started v 435816-001.book Page vi Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 1 First-time setup Identifying required hardware To set up the computer for the first time, you will need the computer, the AC adapter, the power cord, and the primary battery. Components included with the computer may vary by region and by model. Getting Started 11 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Component 1 Power cord Component 4 Country-specific modem adapter

(select models only) 2 AC adapter 5 Modem cable (select models only)

(optional for setup) 3 Primary battery Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. Unless you use dial-up networking, the modem cable is optional for setup. 12 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Setting up the computer Computer setup involves the following tasks:

1. Inserting the battery into the computer 2. Connecting the computer to external power The battery begins to charge. 3. Turning on the computer 4. Setting up the software 5. Creating recovery discs (recommended) Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for instructions. CAUTION: Reduce the risk of file corruption by observing the following practices during the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Getting Started 13 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery To insert a primary battery:

1. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface, with the battery bay toward you. 2. Slide the battery 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 14 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter into the power connector 1 on the computer. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2. 3. Plug the other end of the power cord into an AC outlet 3. Getting Started 15 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup When the computer receives AC power, the battery begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) turns on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery light turns off. Leave the computer connected to external power until the battery is fully charged and the battery light turns off. A partially charged new battery can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery has been fully charged. Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. 16 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup To turn on the computer:

Press the power button 1. The power light on the power button 2 turns on. Getting Started 17 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following points:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, the computer may pause periodically for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register the operating system and the computer during software setup, the computer must be connected by an RJ-45 (network) cable to an existing network that has access to the Internet. If you do not register during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home, in this guide. Step 5: Create recovery discs

(recommended) You can create a set of recovery discs of your full factory image using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. You can use the recovery discs to start up (boot) the computer and restore the operating system and software programs to factory settings in case of system failure or instability. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for detailed instructions. 18 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 2 Quick tour Identifying required hardware Components included with the computer may vary by region and model. The illustrations in this chapter identify the standard features included on most computer models. Getting Started 21 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Top components Component 1 Power button Component 9 Internal microphone

(select models only) 2 Power lights (2)

- TouchPad scroll zone 3 Info button

(select models only) q Fingerprint reader

(select models only) 4 Wireless button w Right TouchPad button 5 Wireless lights (2) e Left TouchPad button 6 Presentation button

(select models only) r Drive light 7 Volume mute button t Battery light 8 Volume scroll zone

(select models only) y TouchPad 22 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Front components Quick tour Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light Component 4 Drive light 5 Speakers (2) 6 Display release latch Getting Started 23 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Left-side components Component Component 1 Power connector 5 Audio-in (microphone) jack 2 Vent 6 1394 port (select models only) 3 USB ports (2) 7 PC Card slot 4 Audio-out (headphone) jack 24 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Right-side components Quick tour Component 1 Media Card Reader

(select models only) 2 USB ports (2)

(select models only) Component 3 Optical drive 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Getting Started 25 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Rear components Component Component 1 Security cable slot 3 External monitor port 2 RJ-45 (network) jack 4 S-Video-out jack

(select models only) 26 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Bottom components Quick tour Component 1 Bluetooth compartment

(select models only) 2 Vents (3) Component 6 Battery release latches (2) 7 Docking connector

(select models only) 3 Accessory battery connector 8 Memory module compartment 4 SIM slot (select models only) 9 WLAN module compartment

(select models only) 5 Battery bay

- Hard drive bay Getting Started 27 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Quick tour Wireless antennae (select models only) Component Component 1 WLAN antennae (2)

(select models only)*

2 WWAN antenna

(select models only)*

*The antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 28 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 3 Next steps Protecting the computer The information in this section explains how your computer can be protected from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, unsafe operation, or system failure. Protecting the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Norton Internet Security is preinstalled on the computer:

Your version of Norton Internet Security includes 60 days of free updates. It is strongly recommended that you protect the computer against new viruses beyond 60 days by purchasing extended update service. For information about using and updating Norton Internet Security and for purchasing extended update service, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security > Help and Support. To access Norton Internet Security, select Start > All Programs > Norton Internet Security. Getting Started 31 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Protecting your system files The HP Backup & Recovery Manager provides several ways to back up the system and to recover optimal system functionality. Refer to Appendix B, Backup and recovery, for additional information. Protecting your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or the computer. To optimize the computers privacy protection features, observe these practices:

Keep the operating system and software updated. Many software updates contain security enhancements. Use a firewall. Firewall software monitors incoming traffic on the computer to block messages that do not meet specific security criteria. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. Protecting the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm, observe these practices:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from most computer or electronic retailers in some regions. 32 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Using the computer safely Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment, observe these practices:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and in Help and Support. To access the guide in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Getting Started 33 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or place the computer on your lap for extended periods. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin for extended periods during operation. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer and the AC adapter to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter or battery provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery purchased as an accessory from HP. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices located in Help and Support. To access the notices in Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support >

User Guides. 34 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Connecting to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide area network (WWAN) Bluetooth If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, refer to Help and Support for information on networking. If you need assistance to connect to a company LAN or WLAN, contact your network administrator. The computer display must be open before you can connect to a wireless network. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. If the computer has a Bluetooth device, you can create a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as computers, telephones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. For information on using a Bluetooth device, refer to Bluetooth online Help. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet, refer to Appendix A, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 35 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Installing additional hardware and software Identifying and installing hardware To see a list of hardware installed on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. 2. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing applications, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Windows online Help for more information. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install the device and any required drivers. Locating and installing software The computer includes software that is provided in the following forms:

Preinstalled on your hard drive. To see a list of the ready-to-use software preinstalled on the computer, follow these steps:

1. Click Start > All Programs. 2. Click the program you want to open. 36 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Provided on a CD or DVD. To install a software program from a disc, follow these steps:

1. Insert the disc into your optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Restart the computer if prompted to do so. Preloaded software. This is software provided on the hard drive but not ready to use. To locate or install preloaded software or drivers, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the check box next to the software program or driver you want to install. For details about using software included with the computer, refer to the software manufacturers instructions, which may be provided on disc, as online Help files, or on the manufacturers Web site. Updating the software installed on the computer Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Getting Started 37 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. Update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer, select Start > Help and Support. Finding the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other information resources about using the computer are available through Help and Support. To access the user guides:

Select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Turning off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 38 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 9 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Next steps If you are unable to turn off the computer with these procedures, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. Getting Started 39 435816-001.book Page 10 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems, perform these troubleshooting steps in the order provided until the problem is resolved:

Refer to Quick troubleshooting, the next section in this chapter. Access additional information about the computer and Web site links through Help and Support. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair tools require an Internet connection, other tools can help you fix a problem when the computer is offline. Contact technical support for further assistance. Getting Started 41 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting The computer is unable to start up To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light turns on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. The following suggestions may help you determine why the computer will not start up:

If the computer is plugged into an AC outlet, be sure that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the power light on the front of the computer is blinking rapidly, replace the AC adapter with one having a higher power rating, and then plug the adapter into an AC outlet. Use only the AC adapter provided with the computer or one approved for this computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is plugged into an external power source other than an AC outlet, plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Be sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. If the computer is running on battery power, try the following procedures in the sequence provided:

If the battery light on the front of the computer is blinking, the battery has reached a low battery level, which may not allow the computer to start up. Plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter, start the computer, and allow the battery to charge. Remove the primary battery and optional accessory battery (if applicable) and plug the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. If you can turn the computer on, one of the batteries may need to be replaced. 42 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM The computer screen is blank Troubleshooting If the computer is on but the screen is blank: the computer may be in the Sleep state or in Hibernation; the computer may not be set to display the image on the computer screen; or the display switch may not be functioning properly. Try the following suggestions to resolve the issue:

To exit Sleep or Hibernation, briefly press the power button. Sleep and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Sleep and Hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is on but not in use, or when the computer has reached a low battery level. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel >

System and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneous display on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to be sure that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. Getting Started 43 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Software is functioning abnormally Follow these suggestions if the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Restart. If you cannot restart the computer using this procedure, refer to the next section, The computer is turned on but not responding. Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on the computer, refer to Protecting the computer from viruses in Chapter 3, Next steps. The computer is turned on but not responding If the computer is turned on, but not responding to software or keyboard commands, turn off the computer by using the standard shutdown procedure:

1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the computer through the operating system by clicking Start, clicking the arrow next to the Lock button, and then clicking Shut Down. 44 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If you are unable to shut down the computer with this procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Using one of the following emergency shutdown procedures will result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Power button. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery. The computer is unusually warm It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that the computer is overheating, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Getting Started 45 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting An external device is not working Follow these suggestions if an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device user guide. Some devices may not be powered by the computer, and must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Be sure that all device connections are secure. Be sure that the device is receiving electrical power. Be sure that the device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, refer to the device manufacturers Web site. Be sure that the correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a disc included with the device or on the device manufacturers Web site. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. The WLAN connection is not working If a WLAN connection is not working as expected, follow these suggestions:

Be sure that the wireless light on the computer is on. If the light is off, press the wireless button to turn it on. Be sure that the computer wireless antennae are free from obstructions. Be sure that the cable or DSL modem and its power cord are properly connected, and the lights are on. 46 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting If applicable, be sure that the wireless router (access point) is turned on and properly connected to the DSL or the cable modem. Disconnect and then reconnect all cables, and turn the power off and then back on. For information on setting up a home wireless network connection, visit http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless

(English only). For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer. Help and Support If the preceding questions and solutions did not address your problem, access Help and Support by selecting Start > Help and Support. Help and Support provides the following assistance:

Information about the computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications Answers to questions about using the computer Product information to help you learn to use the computer and operating system features Updates for the operating system, device drivers, and software provided on the computer Checkups for computer functionality Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures Links to community forums of IT experts Getting Started 47 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Troubleshooting Contacting technical support If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support > Contact support to get online help or to access the technical support telephone numbers. For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > System Information. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. The manufacturer and model of the printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support >

System Information. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). 48 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM A Connect to the Internet from your home The computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must choose an Internet service provider (ISP) and choose the type of Internet connection you want, such as broadband

(wired or wireless) or dial-up. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on the computer model and your location. Choosing an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started A1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home Using the New Connection Wizard The New Connection Wizard works under the following conditions:

You already have an account with an ISP. You have a disc from an ISP. You do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. You have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard, select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling the Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. Choosing the type of Internet connection You can choose one or more of the following methods to connect to the Internet:

Broadband serviceHigh-speed Internet access is provided by an ISP through one of the following services:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services Broadband service may require additional hardware and/or software provided by the ISP. A2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Connect to the Internet from your home WLANInternet connection through a WLAN requires broadband wired service with an ISP as well as a wireless router (purchased separately). To learn about setting up wireless access, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/wireless (English only). WWANThis broadband wireless connection allows your computer to stay connected to the Internet over large geographic areas while the computer is in motion, such as in a car or train. WWAN capability requires an integrated HP Broadband Wireless Module (select models only) and service from a mobile network operator. For information on activating broadband wireless service, refer to the mobile network operator information included with your computer or see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/broadbandwireless

(English only). Dial-upYou can access the Internet by dialing in to a service provider using a modem cable connected to the RJ-11

(modem) jack. Getting Started A3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM B Backup and recovery Creating recovery discs After setting up the computer for the first time, be sure to create a set of recovery discs of the full factory image. The recovery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recover the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system instability or failure. Note the following guidelines before creating recovery discs:

You will need high-quality CD-R, DVD-R, or DVD+R media (purchased separately). Formatted DVDRW discs and DVDRW double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup & Recovery Manager. The computer must be connected to AC power during the process. Only one set of recovery discs can be created per computer. Number each disc before inserting it into the optical drive of the computer. If necessary, you can cancel the disc creation before you have finished creating the recovery discs. The next time you select Create a set of recovery discs

(Recommended), you will be prompted to continue the disc creation. Getting Started B1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a set of recovery discs,:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create a set of recovery discs (Recommended), and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up your information You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. With HP Backup & Recovery Manager, you can perform the following tasks:

Backing up your information regularly to protect your important system files Creating system recovery points that allow you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state Scheduling backups at specific intervals or events When to back up On a regularly scheduled basis Set reminders to back up your information periodically. Before the computer is repaired or restored Before you add or modify hardware or software B2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Back up suggestions Create a set of recovery discs using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Create system recovery points using HP Backup & Recovery Manager, and periodically copy them to disc. Store personal files in the Documents folder and back up these folders periodically. Back up templates stored in their associated programs. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time saver if you have to reset your preferences. To copy the screen and paste it into a word-processing document:

1. Display the screen. 2. Copy the screen. To copy only the active window, press alt+fn+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press fn+prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document, and then select Edit >

Paste. Before you can perform backup and recovery procedures, the computer must be connected to external power. Drivers, utilities, and applications installed by HP can be copied to a CD or to a DVD using HP Backup & Recovery Manager. Getting Started B3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Backing up specific files or folders You can back up specific files or folders to the recovery partition on the hard drive, to an optional external hard drive, or to optical discs (CDs or DVDs). This process will take several minutes, depending on the file size and the speed of the computer. To back up specific files or folders:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Back up user created files and folders and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up the entire hard drive When you perform a complete backup of the hard drive, you are saving the full factory image, including the Windows operating system, software applications, and all personal files and folders. A copy of the entire hard drive image can be stored on another hard drive, on a network drive, or on recovery discs that you create. This process may take over an hour, depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. B4 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 5 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To back up your entire hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Entire Drive Backups, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery points When you back up modifications since your last backup, you are creating system recovery points. This allows you to save a snapshot of your hard drive at a specific point in time. You can then recover back to that point if you want to reverse subsequent changes made to your system. The first system recovery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the first time you perform a backup. Subsequent recovery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recovery points at the following times:

Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally Recovering to an earlier recovery point does not affect data files or e-mails created since that recovery point. Getting Started B5 435816-001.book Page 6 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery To create a system recovery point:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create or manage backups, and then click Next. 4. Click Create or manage Recovery Points, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Scheduling backups Use HP Backup Scheduler to schedule backups for the entire system, for recovery points, or for specific files and folders. With this tool, you can schedule backups at specific intervals (daily, weekly or monthly) or at specific events, such as at system restart or when you dock to an optional docking station (select models only). To schedule backups:

1. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

HP Backup Scheduler. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. B6 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 7 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery You can only recover files that you have previously backed up. HP recommends that you use HP Backup & Recovery Manager to create an entire drive backup as soon as you set up your computer. HP Backup & Recovery Manager helps you with the following tasks for safeguarding your information and restoring it in case of a system failure:

Recovering important filesThis feature helps you reinstall important files without performing a full system recovery. Performing a full system recoveryWith HP Backup &

Recovery Manager, you can recover your full factory image if you experience system failure or instability. HP Backup &

Recovery Manager works from a dedicated recovery partition on the hard drive or from recovery discs you create. Performing a recovery from the recovery discs To perform a recovery from the recovery discs, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive and restart the computer. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Getting Started B7 435816-001.book Page 8 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Backup and recovery Performing a recovery from the hard drive There are 2 ways to initiate a recovery from the hard drive:

From within Windows From the recovery partition Initiating a recovery in Windows To initiate a recovery in Windows, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Select Start > All Programs > HP Backup & Recovery >

Backup & Recovery Manager. 3. Click Next. 4. Click Perform a recovery, and then click Next. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Initiating a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition To initiate a recovery from the hard drive recovery partition, follow these steps:

1. Back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then press f11 before the Windows operating system loads. 3. Click a recovery option, and then click Next. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. B8 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM C Specifications Operating environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is a unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started C1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Specifications Rated input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. C2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 1 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index Bluetooth 35 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 27 buttons info 22 power 17, 22 presentation 22 TouchPad 22 volume mute 22 wireless 22 C cables and cords, power 42 compartments Bluetooth 27 memory module 27 WLAN 27 computer turn off 38 turn on 16 computer viruses 44 connecting the computer to external power 15 connecting to a computer network 35 1394 port, identifying 24 A AC adapter connecting 15 identifying 12 accessory battery connector, identifying 27 altitude specifications C1 antivirus software 44 audio-in (microphone) jack, identifying 24 audio-out (headphone) jack, identifying 24 B battery charging 16 indentifying 12 inserting 14 battery bay, identifying 27 battery light behavior 16 identifying 22, 23 battery release latch, identifying 27 bays battery 27 hard drive 27 Getting Started Index1 435816-001.book Page 2 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index connectors accessory battery 27 docking 27 power 24 country-specific modem adapter 12 D devices, external, troubleshooting 46 display release latch, identifying 23 display, switching image 43 docking connector, identifying 27 drive light, identifying 22, 23 E environmental specifications C1 external devices, troubleshooting 46 external monitor port, identifying 26 F fingerprint reader, identifying 22 firewalls 32 H hard drive bay, identifying 27 Help and Support 47 Hibernation 43 humidity specifications C1 I IEC 60950 compliance 34 image, switching among display devices 43 info button, identifying 22 inserting the battery 14 internal microphone, identifying 22 Internet access A2 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 24 audio-out (headphone) 24 RJ-11 (modem) 25 RJ-45 (network) jack 26 S-Video-out 26 L labels, service tag 48 LAN (local area network) 35 latches battery release 27 display release 23 lights battery 16, 22, 23 drive 22, 23 power 17, 22, 23 wireless 22, 23 locating user guides 38 M Media Card Reader, identifying 25 memory module compartment, identifying 27 Index2 Getting Started 435816-001.book Page 3 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM modem setting up Internet service A2 surge protection 32 modem cable 12 monitor, external 43, 46 N network jack 26 network, connecting computer to 35 New Connection Wizard A2 O operating environment specifications C1 operating system, version number 48 optical drive, identifying 25 overheating, computer 34, 45 P PC Card slot, identifying 24 ports 1394 24 external monitor 26 USB 24, 25 power running the computer on battery 16 turning on computer 17, 42 power button, identifying 22 power connector identifying 24 using 15 Index power cord connecting 15 identifying 12 power light 17, 42 power lights, identifying 22, 23 power surge 32 presentation button, identifying 22 printer 46 Product Id 48 R rated input power specifications C2 registration number, operating system 48 regulatory information notices 34 Regulatory, Safety and Envi-

ronmental Notices 34 RJ-11 (modem) jack, identifying 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 26 S Safety and Comfort Guide 33 scroll zone, TouchPad 22 serial number, computer 48 service tag 48 seurity cable slot, identifying 26 SIM slot, identifying 27 Sleep 43 slot, SIM 27 Getting Started Index3 435816-001.book Page 4 Thursday, December 7, 2006 11:50 AM Index software antivirus 31 setup 18 updates 37 speakers, identifying 23 specifications operating environment C1 rated input power C2 S-Video-out jack, identifying 26 T technical support 48 temperature safety considerations 34 specifications C1 troubleshooting 45 TouchPad buttons, identifying 22 TouchPad, identifying 22 TouchPad scroll zone, identifying 22 traveling with computer C2 troubleshooting display problems 43 external device problems 46 Hibernation or Sleep problems 43 overheating problems 45 resources 41 software problems 44 virus problems 44 wireless network problems 46 turning off computer 38 turning on computer 16, 42 U updates, software 37 USB ports, identifying 24, 25 user guides 38 V vents identifying 24, 27 precautions 45 viruses antivirus software 31 computer 44 volume mute button, identifying 22 volume scroll zone, identifying 22 W wireless button, identifying 22 wireless lights, identifying 22, 23 WLAN (wireless local area network) 35 WLAN antennae, identifying 28 WLAN module compartment 27 WWAN (wireless wide area network) 35 WWAN antenna 28 Index4 Getting Started

 

 

ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Note Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Important safety information on page v, Appendix A, Wireless related information, on page 47, Appendix B, Warranty information, on page 51, and Appendix D, Notices, on page 79. Second Edition (September 2005) Copyright Lenovo 2005. Portions Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005. All rights reserved. U.S. GOVERNMENT USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS: Our products and/or services are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the GSA ADP Schedule contract with Lenovo Group Limited, if any, or the standard terms of this commercial license, or if the agency is unable to accept this Program under these terms, then we provide this Program under the provisions set forth in Commercial Computer SoftwareRestricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, when applicable, or under Rights in Data-General, FAR 52.227.14

(Alternate III). Contents

. Important safety information

. Conditions that require immediate action General safety guidelines . Service . Power cords and power adapters . Extension cords and related devices . Plugs and outlets . Batteries . Heat and product ventilation CD and DVD drive safety . Additional safety information Laser compliance statement

. v

. v

. vi

. vi

. vii

. viii

. viii

. viii

. ix

. x

. x

. xiv Important notice for users

. Important regulatory notice for users Information about hard disk capacity

. xvii

. xvii

. xvii Finding information with the ThinkVantage button

. xix

. A startup problem . Fingerprint authentication problems . Other problems . Starting BIOS Setup Utility

. Recovering pre-installed software . Upgrading the hard disk drive . Replacing the battery . Chapter 3. Getting help and service

. Getting help and service . Getting help on the Web . Calling the Customer Support Center

. Getting help around the world . Appendix A. Wireless related information

. Wireless interoperability . Usage environment and your health . Authorized Operation Within the United

. States and Canada . Enabling Extended Channel Mode

. Chapter 1. Overview of your new ThinkPad computer . Your ThinkPad Z60t Series computer at a glance

. Your ThinkPad Z60m Series computer at a

. glance

. ThinkPad Z60t Series Features

. ThinkPad Z60m Series Features . Specifications . Caring for your ThinkPad computer

. 1

. 2

. 3

. 4

. 5

. 7

. 8 Appendix B. Warranty information . Lenovo Statement of Limited Warranty . Part 1 - General Terms

. Part 2 - Country-unique Terms . Part 3 - Warranty Information

. Guarantee supplement for Mexico

. Appendix C. Customer Replaceable Units

(CRUs)

. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems

. Diagnosing problems . Troubleshooting . Error messages

. Errors without messages . A password problem

. A power switch problem . Keyboard problems

. UltraNav problems . Standby or hibernation problems . Computer screen problems

. Battery problems

. Hard disk drive problems

. 13

. 14

. 14

. 14

. 19

. 20

. 21

. 21

. 22

. 23

. 26

. 27

. 28 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. Appendix D. Notices . Notices . Television output notice

. Electronic emissions notices . Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) Declaration of Conformity

. Industry Canada Class B emission

. compliance statement . European Union EMC Directive

. conformance statement

. Environmental notices for Japan

. IBM Lotus Software Offer Trademarks

. 29

. 30

. 30

. 33

. 34

. 35

. 40

. 43

. 44

. 44

. 44

. 46 47

. 47

. 47

. 48

. 49

. 51

. 51

. 51

. 55

. 69

. 76

. 77

. 79

. 79

. 80

. 80

. 80

. 81

. 81

. 82

. 83

. 85 iii Index . 87 iv ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Important safety information Note Please read important safety information first. This information can help you safely use your ThinkPad personal computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Lenovo Statement of Limited Warranty. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition to mobile personal computers, some products (such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, your computer product may contain a coin-sized internal battery that provides power to your system clock even when the machine is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computers. Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your machine. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking or hissing. These conditions might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. v Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. However, do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see Worldwide telephone list on page 72. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the conditions listed below, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. v Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken or damaged. v Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks or fire. v Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. v A cracking, hissing or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the v Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord or power adapter. v The computer product, the power cord or power adapter has been exposed v The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. v The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating product. to water. instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. General safety guidelines Always observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury and property damage. Service Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center. Use only a service provider who is approved to repair your particular product. vi ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Note: Some parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. These parts are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo expressly identifies CRUs as such, and provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to replace those parts. You must closely follow all instructions when performing such replacements. Always make sure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source before you attempt the replacement. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for proper UL certification. DANGER Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away. Attention: Before replacing any CRUs, turn off the computer and wait three to five minutes to let the computer cool before opening the cover. Power cords and power adapters Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cord and power adapter are intended for use with this product only. They should never be used with any other product. Never wrap a power cord around the power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect the cord and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids can also cause gradual corrosion of the power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on the adapter which can eventually result in overheating. Always connect power cords and signal cables in the correct order and ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Important safety information vii Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins and/or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Plugs and outlets If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Batteries All personal computers manufactured by Lenovo contain a non-rechargeable coin cell battery to provide power to the system clock. In addition many mobile products such as ThinkPad notebook PCs utilize a rechargeable battery pack to provide system power when in portable mode. Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. viii ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Never attempt to open or service any battery. Do not crush, puncture, or incinerate batteries or short circuit the metal contacts. Do not expose the battery to water or other liquids. Only recharge the battery pack strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery pack or coin cell. If your battery is damaged, or if you notice any discharge from your battery or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads, stop using the battery and obtain a replacement from the battery manufacturer. Batteries can degrade when they are left unused for long periods of time. For some rechargeable batteries (particularly Lithium Ion batteries), leaving a battery unused in a discharged state could increase the risk of a battery short circuit, which could shorten the life of the battery and can also pose a safety hazard. Do not let rechargeable Lithium-Ion batteries completely discharge or store these batteries in a discharged state. Heat and product ventilation Computers generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook PCs can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

v Do not leave the base of your computer in contact with your lap or any part of your body for an extended period when the computer is functioning or when the battery is charging. Your computer produces some heat during normal operation. Extended contact with the body could cause discomfort or, potentially, a skin burn. v Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. v Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover or disable these features. You should inspect your desktop computer for dust accumulation at least once every three months. Before inspecting your computer, turn off the power and unplug the computers power cord from the electrical outlet; then remove any dust from vents and perforations in the bezel. If you notice external dust accumulation, you should also examine and remove dust from the inside of the computer including heat sink inlet fins, power supply vents, and fans. Always turn off and unplug the computer before opening the cover. If possible, avoid operating your computer within 2 feet of high-traffic areas. If you must operate your computer in or near a high-traffic area, you should inspect and, if necessary, clean your computer more frequently. Important safety information ix For your safety and to maintain optimum computer performance, always follow these basic precautions with your desktop computer:

v Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. v Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. v Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. v Do not block or restrict airflow into the front of the computer. v Do not block the airflow vents on the back of the computer. v Do not store or operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. v Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35 C (95 F). v Do not use non-ThinkCentre air filtration devices. CD and DVD drive safety CD and DVD drives spin discs at a high speed. If a CD or DVD is cracked or otherwise physically damaged, it is possible for the disc to break apart or even shatter when the CD drive is in use. To protect against possible injury due to this situation, and to reduce the risk of damage to your machine, do the following:

v Always store CD/DVD discs in their original packaging v Always store CD/DVD discs out of direct sunlight and away from direct v Remove CD/DVD discs from the computer when not in use v Do not bend or flex CD/DVD discs, or force them into the computer or v Check CD/DVD discs for cracks before each use. Do not use cracked or heat sources their packaging damaged discs Additional safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid shock hazard, connect and disconnect cables as shown below when installing, moving, or opening the covers of this product or attached devices. If the 3-pin power cord is provided with this product, it must be used with a properly grounded outlet. ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide x To Connect To Disconnect Turn everything OFF. Turn everything OFF. First, attach all cables to devices. First, remove the power cord from the outlet. Remove signal cables from receptacles. Remove all cables from devices. Attach the signal cables to receptacles. Attach the power cord to an outlet. Turn the device ON. Important safety information xi DANGER Reduce the risk of fire and electric shock by always following basic safety precautions, including the following:

v Do not use your computer in or near water. v During electrical storms:

Do not use your computer with the telephone cable connection. Do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. DANGER The battery pack should be stored at room temperature, charged to approx. 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the battery pack be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. DANGER If the rechargeable battery pack is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:

v Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. v Keep the battery pack away from fire. v Do not expose it to water or rain. v Do not attempt to disassemble it. v Do not short-circuit it. v Keep it away from children. Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. xii ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide DANGER If the backup battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of explosion. The lithium battery contains lithium and can explode if it is not properly handled or disposed of. Replace only with a battery of the same type. To avoid possible injury or death, do not: (1) throw or immerse the battery into water, (2) allow it to heat to more than 100 C (212 F), or (3) attempt to repair or disassemble it. Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. DANGER Follow the instruction below when installing or reconfiguring the CDC or Mini PCI option. To avoid shock hazard, disconnect all the cables and the ac adapter when you install the CDC or Mini PCI option or open the covers of the system or attached devices. Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. CAUTION:

When you have added or upgraded a CDC or Mini PCI Card or a memory card, do not use your computer until you have closed the cover. Never use the computer when the cover is open. CAUTION:

The fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury. Do not put it in trash that is disposed of in landfills. Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or regulations. The LCD is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Important safety information xiii DANGER To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury when using telephone equipment, always follow basic safety precautions, such as:

v Never install telephone wiring during an electrical storm. v Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. v Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. v Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. v Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. v Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. v Use only No. 26 AWG or larger (thicker) telephone cable. Laser compliance statement An optical storage drive (device), such as a CD-ROM, CD-RW, DVD-ROM drive and SuperDisk, which can be installed in the Lenovo ThinkPad computer is a laser product. The drives classification label (shown below) is on the surface of the drive. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT The drive is certified by the manufacturer to comply with the requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class I laser products at the date of manufacture. In other countries, the drive is certified to conform to the requirements of IEC825 and EN60825 for Class 1 laser products. xiv ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide DANGER Do not open the optical storage drive unit; no user adjustments or serviceable parts are inside. Use of controls, adjustments, or the performance of procedures other than those specified might result in hazardous radiation exposure. Class 1 laser products are not considered hazardous. The design of the laser system and the optical storage drive ensures that there is no exposure to laser radiation above a Class 1 level during normal operation, user maintenance, or servicing. Some drives contain an embedded Class 3A laser diode. Note this warning:

DANGER Emits visible and invisible laser radiation when open. Avoid direct eye exposure. Do not stare into the beam or view it directly with optical instruments. DANGER Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. Many PC products and accessories contain cords, cables or wires, such as power cords or cords to connect the accessory to a PC. If this product has such a cord, cable or wire, then the following warning applies:

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Save these instructions. Important safety information xv xvi ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Important notice for users Important regulatory notice for users The ThinkPad Z60t Series computer and the ThinkPad Z60m Series computer comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which they have been approved for wireless use. You are requested to install and use your ThinkPad computer in strict accordance with the local RF regulations. Before you use the ThinkPad computer, please find and read ThinkPad Z60t Series Regulatory Notice or ThinkPad Z60m Series Regulatory Notice, the notice that supplements this Service and Troubleshooting Guide. The notice is included in the package with this publication. Information about hard disk capacity Instead of providing a recovery CD or a Windows CD with your computer, Lenovo provides simpler methods of accomplishing the tasks typically associated with these CDs. The files and programs for these alternative methods are on your hard disk, which eliminates having to locate misplaced CDs and problems associated with using an incorrect CD version. The complete backup of all the files and programs that Lenovo preinstalled on your computer resides in a hidden section, or partition, of the hard disk. Although hidden, the backups in the partition consume hard disk space. Therefore, when checking the capacity of your hard disk according to Windows, you might note that the total capacity of the disk appears to be smaller than anticipated. This discrepancy is explained by the contents of the hidden partition. (See Recovering pre-installed software on page 34.) For more information about recovering your hard disk to the original preinstalled contents, refer to your on-system help source, the ThinkVantage Productivity Center program. Press the ThinkVantage button and then browse the Learn section for various topics that cover backing up and recovering. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. xvii xviii ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Finding information with the ThinkVantage button The blue ThinkVantage button can help you in many situations when your computer is working normally, and even when it is not. At your desktop, press the ThinkVantage button to open ThinkVantage Productivity Center. ThinkVantage Productivity Center is your on-board computer help center that brings you informative illustrations and easy-to-follow instructions for getting started and staying productive. You can also use the ThinkVantage button to interrupt the startup sequence of your computer and start the ThinkVantage Rescue and Recovery workspace. Use the Rescue and Recovery workspace to do the following:

v Get essential system information. v Troubleshoot problems using diagnostics. v Restore your backups, assuming you have made backups using the Rescue and Recovery program. v Start the BIOS Setup Utility where you can view and change BIOS settings. v Start a utility that enables you to change your startup sequence. Some of the topics in your help system contain brief video clips that show you how to perform certain tasks, such as replacing your battery, inserting a PC Card, or upgrading your memory. Use the controls shown to play, pause, and rewind the video clip. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. xix Note: If a bootable device is attached to the computer, and the boot priority of that device is higher than IDE HDD, the computer boots from that device. xx ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Chapter 1. Overview of your new ThinkPad computer Your ThinkPad Z60t Series computer at a glance

. Your ThinkPad Z60m Series computer at a

. glance

. 2

. 3

. ThinkPad Z60t Series Features

. ThinkPad Z60m Series Features . Specifications . Caring for your ThinkPad computer

. 4

. 5

. 7

. 8 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 1 Your ThinkPad at a glance Your ThinkPad Z60t Series computer at a glance Front view System-status indicators ThinkVantage button TrackPoint pointing device ThinkLight(R) Computer display Power status indicators Touch pad Fingerprint reader USB connector Ultrabay Slim IEEE 1394 connector SD Card slot USB connector PC Card slot Rear view Power jack Ethernet connector Modem connector Monitor connector 2 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Your ThinkPad at a glance Your ThinkPad Z60m Series computer at a glance Front view System-status indicators ThinkVantage button TrackPoint pointing device Touch pad Fingerprint reader 3-1 Digital Media Reader Rear view ThinkLight(R) Computer display Power status indicators USB connector Ultrabay Enhanced Video-out connector USB connector Power jack ExpressCard/PC Card slots Audio jacks IEEE 1394 connector Ethernet connector Modem connector Monitor connector Chapter 1. Overview of your new ThinkPad computer 3 Features ThinkPad Z60t Series Features Processor v v Intel Pentium M Processor Intel Celeron M Processor Memory v Double data rate II (DDRII) synchronous dynamic random access memory

(DRAM) Storage device v 2.5-inch hard disk drive Display The color display uses TFT technology:

v Size: 14 inch v Resolution:

LCD: Up to 1680-by-1050, depending on the model External monitor: Up to 2048-by-1536 v Brightness control Keyboard v Fingerprint reader (on some models) v 89key, 90key, or 94key v UltraNav (TrackPoint pointing device and touch pad) v Fn key function v ThinkVantage button v Volume control buttons v ThinkLight External interface v External-monitor connector v PC Card slot (Type II PC Card) v SD card slot v Stereo headphone jack v Microphone jack v Video-out connector (S-Video) v 3 Universal Serial Bus (USB) connectors v v v RJ11 telephone connector v RJ45 Ethernet connector v Ultrabay Slim v Docking connector v v IEEE 1394 connector Infrared port Integrated wireless LAN feature (on some models) Integrated Bluetooth feature (on some models) 4 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide ThinkPad Z60m Series Features Processor v v Intel Pentium M Processor Intel Celeron M Processor Features Memory v Double data rate II (DDRII) synchronous dynamic random access memory

(DRAM) Storage device v 2.5-inch hard disk drive Display The color display uses TFT technology:

v Size: 15.4 inch v Resolution:

LCD: Up to 1680-by-1050, depending on the model External monitor: Up to 2048-by-1536 v Brightness control Keyboard v Fingerprint reader (on some models) v 89key, 90key, or 94key v UltraNav (TrackPoint pointing device and touch pad) v Fn key function v ThinkVantage button v Volume control buttons v ThinkLight External interface v External-monitor connector v ExpressCard/PC Card slots (the upper slot: ExpressCard, the lower slot:

Type I or Type II PC Card) v 31 Digital Media Reader v Stereo headphone jack v Microphone jack v Video-out connector (S-Video) v 3 Universal Serial Bus (USB) connectors v v v RJ11 telephone connector v RJ45 Ethernet connector v Ultrabay Enhanced v Docking connector v IEEE 1394 connector Infrared port Integrated wireless LAN feature (on some models) Chapter 1. Overview of your new ThinkPad computer 5 Features v Integrated Bluetooth feature (on some models) 6 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Specifications Specifications Size 14-inch model (Z60t) v Width: 334 mm (13.14 in.) v Depth: 228 mm (8.97 in.) v Height: 26.6 mm front, 30 mm back (1.04 in., 1.18 in.) 15.4inch model (Z60m) v Width: 357 mm (14.05 in.) v Depth: 262.5 mm (10.33 in.) v Height: 37.3 front, 40.2 mm back (1.46 in., 1.58 in.) Environment v Maximum altitude without pressurization: 3048 m (10,000 ft) v Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft)

- Operating with no diskette: 5 to 35C (41 to 95F)

- Operating with a diskette: 10 to 35C (50 to 95F)

- Not operating: 5 to 43C (41 to 110F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft)

- Maximum operating temperature, 31.3C (88 F) Note: When you charge the battery pack, its temperature must be at least 10C (50F). v Relative humidity:

Operating with no diskette in the drive: 8% to 90%

Operating with a diskette in the drive: 8% to 80%

Heat output v 72 W (246 Btu/hr) maximum Power source (ac adapter) v Sine-wave input at 50 to 60 Hz v Input rating of the ac adapter: 100-240 V ac, 50 to 60 Hz Battery pack v Lithium-ion (Li-Ion) battery pack Nominal voltage: 10.8 V dc Capacity: 2.6 AH (on some models) Chapter 1. Overview of your new ThinkPad computer 7 Caring for your ThinkPad computer Caring for your ThinkPad computer Though your computer is designed to function reliably in normal work environments, you need to use common sense in handling it. By following these important tips, you will get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Important tips:

Be careful about where and how you work v Do not leave the base of your computer in contact with your lap or any part of your body for an extended period when the computer is functioning or when the battery is charging. Your computer dissipates some heat during normal operation. This heat is a function of the level of system activity and battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or, eventually, a skin burn. v Place liquids away from your computer to avoid spills, and keep your computer away from water (to avoid the danger of electrical shock). v Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. v Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers (within 13 cm/5 in). v Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Be gentle with your computer v Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or under the keyboard. v Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. v Your computer display is designed to be opened and used at an angle slightly greater than 90 degrees. Do not open the display beyond 180 degrees, as this might damage the computer hinge. Carry your computer properly v Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables. v Be sure your computer is in standby or hibernation mode, or turned off, before moving it. This will prevent damage to the hard disk drive and data loss. v When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. 8 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Caring for your ThinkPad computer v Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushion and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Handle storage media and drives properly v Avoid inserting diskettes at an angle and attaching multiple or loose v diskette labels, as these can lodge in the drive. If your computer comes with an optical drive such as CD, DVD, or CD-RW/DVD drive, do not touch the surface of a disc or the lens on the tray. v Wait until you hear the CD or DVD click into the center pivot of an optical drive such as CD, DVD, or CD-RW/DVD drive before closing the tray. v When installing your hard disk, diskette, CD, DVD, or CD-RW/DVD drive, follow the instructions shipped with your hardware, and apply pressure only where needed on the device. See Access Help, your on-board help system, for information on replacing your hard disk drive. Take care in setting passwords v Remember your passwords. If you forget a supervisor or hard disk password, a Lenovo authorized service provider can not reset it, and you might have to replace your system board or hard disk drive. Other important tips v Your computer modem might use only an analog telephone network, or public-switched telephone network (PSTN). Do not connect the modem to a PBX (private branch exchange) or any other digital telephone extension line because this could damage your modem. Analog phone lines are often used in homes, while digital phone lines are often used in hotels or office buildings. If you are not sure which kind of phone line you are using, contact your telephone company. v Your computer might have both an Ethernet connector and a modem connector. If so, be sure to connect your communication cable to the correct one, so your connector is not damaged. See Access Help, your on-board help system, for information on the location of these connectors. v Register your ThinkPad products with Lenovo (refer to the Web page:

www.lenovo.com/register). This can help authorities return your computer to you if it is lost or stolen. Registering your computer also enables Lenovo to notify you about possible technical information and upgrades. v Only an authorized ThinkPad repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. v Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. v Take care not to turn your computer over while the ac adapter is plugged in. This could break the adapter plug. Chapter 1. Overview of your new ThinkPad computer 9 Caring for your ThinkPad computer v Turn off your computer if you are replacing a device in a device bay, or else v verify that the device is warm- or hot-swappable. If you exchange drives in your computer, reinstall the plastic bezel faces (if supplied). v Store your external and removable hard disk, diskette, CD, DVD, and CD-RW/DVD drives in the appropriate containers or packaging when they are not being used. v Before you install any of the following devices, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the device. PC Card Smart Card Memory Card, such as SD Card, Memory Stick, and MultiMediaCard Memory module Mini-PCI Card Communication Daughter Card Cleaning the cover of your computer Occasionally clean your computer as follows:

1. Prepare a mixture of a gentle kitchen-use detergent (one that does not contain abrasive powder or strong chemicals such as acid or alkaline). Use 5 parts water to 1 part detergent. 2. Absorb the diluted detergent into a sponge. 3. Squeeze excess liquid from the sponge. 4. Wipe the cover with the sponge, using a circular motion and taking care not to let any excess liquid drip. 5. Wipe the surface to remove the detergent. 6. Rinse the sponge with clean running water. 7. Wipe the cover with the clean sponge. 8. Wipe the surface again with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. 9. Wait for the surface to dry completely and remove any cloth fibers from the computer surface. Cleaning your computer keyboard 1. Absorb some isopropyl rubbing alcohol on a soft, dust-free cloth. 2. Wipe each keytop surface with the cloth. Wipe the keys one by one; if you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth may hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Make sure that no liquid drips onto or between the keys. 3. Allow to dry. 10 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Caring for your ThinkPad computer 4. To remove any crumbs and dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or cool air from a hair drier. Note: Avoid spraying cleaner directly on the display or the keyboard. Cleaning your computer display 1. Gently wipe the display with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. If you see a scratchlike mark on your display, it might be a stain transferred from the keyboard or the TrackPoint pointing device when the cover was pressed from the outside. 2. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. 3. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or a 50-50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water that does not contain impurities. 4. Wring out as much of the liquid as you can. 5. Wipe the display again; do not let any liquid drip into the computer. 6. Be sure to dry the display before closing it. Care for the fingerprint reader The following actions could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly:

v Scratching the surface of the reader with a hard, pointed object. v Scraping the surface of the reader with your nail or anything hard. v Using or touching the reader with a dirty finger. If you notice any of the following conditions, gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth:

v The surface of the reader is dirty or stained. v The surface of the reader is wet. v The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint. Chapter 1. Overview of your new ThinkPad computer 11 Caring for your ThinkPad computer 12 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Chapter 2. Solving computer problems

. Diagnosing problems . Troubleshooting . Error messages

. Errors without messages . A password problem

. A power switch problem . Keyboard problems

. UltraNav problems . Standby or hibernation problems . Computer screen problems

. 14

. 14

. 14

. 19

. 20

. 21

. 21

. 22

. 23

. 26

. Battery problems

. Hard disk drive problems

. A startup problem . Fingerprint authentication problems . Other problems . Starting BIOS Setup Utility

. Recovering pre-installed software . Upgrading the hard disk drive . Replacing the battery . 27

. 28

. 29

. 30

. 30

. 33

. 34

. 35

. 40 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 13 Solving computer problems Diagnosing problems If you have a problem with your computer, you can test it by using PC-Doctor for Windows. To run PC-Doctor for Windows, do as follows:

1. Click Start. 2. Move the pointer to All Programs (in Windows other than Windows XP, Programs) and then to PC-Doctor for Windows. 3. Click PC-Doctor. 4. Choose one of the tests from either Device Categories or Test Scripts. Attention Running any tests can take up to several minutes or longer. Make sure you have time to run the entire test; do not interrupt the test while it is running. The System Test of the Test Scripts runs some tests of critical hardware components, but it does not run all of the diagnostic tests in PC-Doctor for Windows. If PC-Doctor for Windows reports that all of the tests in the System Test have been run and that it has found no problems, consider running more of the tests in PC-Doctor for Windows. If you are preparing to contact the Customer Support Center, be sure to print the test log so that you can rapidly provide information to the help technician. Troubleshooting If you do not find your problem here, refer to Access Help, your on-board help system. Open ThinkVantage Productivity Center by pressing the ThinkVantage button, and click Access Help. The following section describes only problems that might prevent you from accessing this help system. Error messages Notes:

1. 2. The version of PC-Doctor referred to here is PC-Doctor for Windows. In the charts, x can be any character. Message 0175: Bad CRC1, stop POST task 0176: System Security -

The System has been tampered with. Solution The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block #6). Have the computer serviced. This message is displayed if you remove the Security Chip and reinstall it, or install a new one. To clear the error, enter the BIOS Setup Utility. If this does not solve the problem, have the computer serviced. 14 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Solving computer problems Message 0177: Bad SVP data, stop POST task. 0182: Bad CRC2. Enter BIOS Setup and load Setup defaults. 0185: Bad startup sequence settings. Enter BIOS Setup and load Setup defaults. 0187: EAIA data access error 0188: Invalid RFID Serialization Information Area. 0189: Invalid RFID configuration information area 0190: Critical low-battery error 0191: System Security -

Invalid remote change requested. 0192: System Security -

Embedded Security hardware tamper detected. 0199: System Security -

Security password retry count exceeded. 01C8: More than one modem devices are found. Remove one of them. Press <Esc> to continue. 01C9: More than one Ethernet devices are found. Remove one of them. Press <Esc> to continue. Solution Checksum of the supervisor password in the EEPROM is not correct. The system board should be replaced. Have the computer serviced. Checksum of the CRC2 setting in the EEPROM is not correct. Go to BIOS Setup Utility. Press F9 and then Enter to load the default setting. Press F10 and then Enter to restart the system. Checksum of the startup sequence setting in the EEPROM is not correct. Go to BIOS Setup Utility. Press F9 and then Enter to load the default setting. Press F10 and then Enter to restart the system. The access to EEPROM has failed. Have the computer serviced. The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 0 and 1). The system board should be replaced, and the box serial number needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced. The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 4 and 5). The system board should be replaced, and the UUID needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced. The computer turned off because the battery is low. Connect the ac adapter to the computer and charge the battery, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. The system configuration change has failed. Confirm the operation and try again. To clear the error, enter the BIOS Setup Utility. The Security Chip has been replaced with a different one. Have the computer serviced. This message is displayed if you enter a wrong supervisor password more than three times. Confirm the supervisor password and try again. To clear the error, enter the BIOS Setup Utility. Remove a Modem Mini-PCI Card. Otherwise, press Esc to ignore the warning message. If this does not solve the problem, have the computer serviced. Your ThinkPad computer has a built-in Ethernet feature, and you cannot add another such feature by installing an Ethernet device. If this error message is displayed, remove the Ethernet device that you installed. Otherwise press Esc to ignore the warning message. If this does not solve the problem, have the computer serviced. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 15 Solving computer problems Message 01CA: More than one Wireless LAN devices are found. Remove one of them. Press <Esc> to continue. 0200: Hard disk error 021x: Keyboard error Solution Remove one of the wireless LAN cards. Otherwise, press Esc to ignore the message. If this does not solve the problem, have the computer serviced. The hard disk is not working. Make sure that the hard disk drive is attached firmly. Run the BIOS Setup Utility; then make sure the hard disk drive is not disabled in the Startup menu. Make sure that there are no objects placed on the keyboard, or if you have one, the external keyboard. Turn off the computer, and turn off all attached devices. Turn on the computer first; then turn on the attached devices. If you still see the same error code, do the following:

If an external keyboard is connected, do the following:

v Turn off the computer and disconnect the external keyboard; then turn on the computer. Make sure that the built-in keyboard operates correctly. If it does, have the external keyboard serviced. v Make sure that the external keyboard is connected to the correct connector. Test the computer by using PC-Doctor. v If the computer stops during the test, have the computer serviced. 0230: Shadow RAM error The shadow RAM failed. Test your computers memory with PC-Doctor. If you added a memory module just before turning the computer on, reinstall it. Then test the memory with PC-Doctor. 0231: System RAM error The system RAM failed. Test your computers memory with PC-Doctor. If 0232: Extended RAM error 0250: System battery error 0251: System CMOS checksum bad you added a memory module just before turning the computer on, reinstall it. Then test the memory with PC-Doctor. The extended RAM failed. Test your computers memory with PC-Doctor. If you have increased memory just before turning the computer on, reinstall it. Then test the memory with PC-Doctor. The backup battery, which is used to preserve the configuration information, such as the date and time, while the computer is turned off, is depleted. Replace the battery and run BIOS Setup Utility to verify the configuration. If you still have a problem, have the computer serviced. The system CMOS might have been corrupted by an application program. The computer uses the default settings. Run BIOS Setup Utility to reconfigure the settings. If you still see the same error code, have the computer serviced. 0260: System timer error Have the computer serviced. 0270: Real time clock Have the computer serviced. error 16 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Message 0271: Date and time error 0280: Previous boot incomplete Solving computer problems Solution Neither the date nor the time is set in the computer. Set the date and time, using the BIOS Setup Utility. Your computer was previously unable to complete the boot process. Turn the computer off; then turn it on to start the BIOS Setup Utility. Verify the configuration and then restart the computer either by choosing the Exit Saving Changes option under the Restart item or by pressing F10. If you still see the same error code, have the computer serviced. The Mini-PCI network card is not supported on this computer. Remove it. Have the computer serviced. Have the computer serviced. Have the computer serviced. Have the computer serviced. 02D0: System cache error The cache is disabled. Have the computer serviced. 02F4: EISA CMOS not writable 02F5: DMA test failed 02F6: Software NMI failed 02F7: Fail-safe timer NMI failed 1802: Unauthorized network card is plugged in - Power off and remove the miniPCI network card. 1803: Unauthorized daughter card is plugged in - Power off and remove the daughter card. 1804: Unauthorized WAN card is plugged in

- Power off and remove the WAN card. The WAN card is not supported on this computer. Remove it. The daughter card is not supported on this computer. Remove it. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 17 Solving computer problems Message 1810: Hard disk partition layout error Solution A problem in recognizing the layout of the partition on the hard disk has halted computer startup. Either the Predesktop Area has been deleted, or the hard disk contains corrupt data. To try to restart your computer, complete one of the following:

v If the Predesktop Area has been deleted 1. Press F1 to open the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. Select Security -> Predesktop Area -> Predesktop Area. 3. Set this item to Disabled. 4. Save and exit. If the above fails 1. Press Enter. 2. Double-click RECOVER TO FACTORY CONTENTS and follow v 1820: More than one external fingerprint reader is attached. Power off and remove all but the reader that you set up within your main operating system. The power-on password prompt The hard disk password prompt Hibernation error on-screen instructions. Note: This will permanently erase the entire contents of the hard disk, and then restore software preinstalled. Press F1 to open BIOS Setup Utility, or Enter to start the Predesktop Area. If the computer still does not start, call the Support Center. Telephone numbers are listed in Worldwide telephone list on page 72. Only one external fingerprint reader is supported on this computer. Remove all but the reader that you have set up for the authentication. A power-on password or a supervisor password is set. Type the password and press Enter to use the computer. If the power-on password is not accepted, a supervisor password might have been set. Type the supervisor password and press Enter. If you still see the same error message, have the computer serviced. A hard disk password is set. Type the password and press Enter to use the computer. If you still see the same error message, have the computer serviced. The system configuration changed between the time your computer entered hibernation mode and the time it left this mode, and your computer cannot resume normal operation. v Restore the system configuration to what it was before your computer entered hibernation mode. If the memory size has been changed, re-create the hibernation file. v 18 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Solving computer problems Message Operating system not found. Solution Verify the following:

v The hard disk drive is correctly installed. v A startable diskette is in the diskette drive Fan error EMM386 Not Installed -

Unable to Set Page Frame Base Address. If you still see the same error message, check the boot sequence, using the BIOS Setup Utility. The cooling fan has failed. Have the computer serviced. Edit C:\CONFIG.SYS and change a line from device=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE RAM to device=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS CardBus Configuration Error - Device Disabled and save this file. Go to the BIOS Setup Utility. Press F9 and then Enter to load the default setting. Thermal sensing error Authentification of system services failed. Press <Esc> to resume. Press F10 and then Enter to restart the system. The thermal sensor is not functioning correctly. Have the computer serviced. The Predesktop Area in the HDD is broken. To use the Predesktop Area, get a Recovery CD, then recover the Predesktop Area using it. Errors without messages Problem:

When I turn on the machine, nothing appears on the screen and the machine does not beep while starting up. Note: If you are not sure whether you heard any beeps, turn off the computer; then turn it on again, and listen again. If you are using an external monitor, refer to Computer screen problems on page 26. Solution:

If a power-on password is set, press any key to display the power-on password prompt, and then type the correct password and press Enter. If the power-on password prompt does not appear, the brightness level might be set to minimum brightness. Adjust the brightness level by pressing Fn+Home. If the screen still remains blank, make sure that:

v The battery is installed correctly. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 19 Solving computer problems v The ac adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet. v The computer power is on. (Turn on the power switch again for confirmation.) If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Problem:

When I turn on the machine, nothing appears on the screen, but I hear two or more beeps. Solution:

Make sure that the memory card is installed correctly. If it is, but the screen is still blank, and you hear five beeps, have the computer serviced. If you hear 4 cycles of 4 beeps each, the Security Chip has a problem. Have the computer serviced. Problem:

When I turn on the machine, only a white pointer appears on a blank screen. Solution:

Reinstall your operating system, and turn on the computer. If you still see only the pointer on the screen, have the computer serviced. Problem:

My screen goes blank while the computer is on. Solution Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Touch the TrackPoint pointing device or the touch pad, or press a key to exit the screen saver, or press the power switch to resume from standby or hibernation mode. Problem:

The DOS full-screen looks smaller. Solution:

If you use a DOS application that supports only 640480 resolution (VGA mode), the screen image might look slightly distorted or appear smaller than the display size. This is to maintain compatibility with other DOS applications. To expand the screen image to the same size as the actual screen, start the ThinkPad Configuration Program and click LCD; then select the Screen expansion function. (The image might still look slightly distorted.) A password problem Problem:

I forgot my password. 20 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Solution:

Solving computer problems If you forgot your power-on password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password canceled. If you forgot your hard disk password, Lenovo authorized servicer can not reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forgot your supervisor password, Lenovo authorized servicer can not reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. A power switch problem Problem:

The system does not respond, and you cannot turn off the computer. Solution:

Turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power switch for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the ac adapter and the battery. Keyboard problems Problem:

All or some of the keys on the keyboard do not work. Solution:

If the problem occurred immediately after the computer returned from standby mode, enter the power-on password if one has been set. If an external PS/2 keyboard is connected, the numeric keypad on your computer does not work. Use the numeric keypad on the external keyboard. If an external numeric keypad or a mouse is connected:

1. Turn off the computer. 2. Remove the external numeric keypad or the mouse. 3. Turn on the computer and try using the keyboard again. If the keyboard problem is resolved, carefully reconnect the external numeric keypad, external keyboard, or mouse, making sure that you have seated the connectors properly. If keys on the keyboard still do not work, have the computer serviced. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 21 Solving computer problems Problem:

A number appears when you type a letter. Solution The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press and hold Shift; then press NumLk. Problem:

All or some of the keys on the external numeric keypad do not work. Solution:

Make sure that the external numeric keypad is correctly connected to the computer. Problem Some or all of the keys on the external PS/2 keyboard do not work. Solution If you are using the ThinkPad Advanced Dock, the ThinkPad Advanced Mini Dock, or the ThinkPad Essential Port Replicator, make sure that the keyboard cable is correctly connected to the keyboard connector. If the connection is correct, disconnect the cable and make sure that the built-in keyboard operates properly. If the built-in keyboard works, there is a problem with the external keyboard. Try using a different external keyboard. UltraNav problems Problem:

The pointer drifts when the computer is turned on or after it resumes normal operation. Solution:

The pointer might drift when you are not using the TrackPoint pointing device during normal operation. This is a normal characteristic of the TrackPoint pointing device and is not a defect. Pointer drifting might occur for several seconds under the following conditions:

v When the computer is turned on. v When the computer resumes normal operation. v When the TrackPoint pointing device is pressed for a long time. v When the temperature changes. Problem:

The mouse or the pointing device does not work. Solution:

Make sure that the TrackPoint pointing device and the touch pad are set to Automatic in the ThinkPad Configuration Program. Then detach the mouse or the pointing device, and try using the TrackPoint pointing device 22 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Solving computer problems and the touch pad. If the TrackPoint pointing device and the touch pad work, the error might be due to the mouse or the pointing device. Make sure that the cable for the mouse or the pointing device is securely connected to the ThinkPad Advanced Dock, ThinkPad Advanced Mini Dock, or the ThinkPad Essential Port Replicator. If your mouse is incompatible with the PS/2 mouse, disable the TrackPoint pointing device using the ThinkPad Configuration Program. Note: For more information, see the manual supplied with the mouse. Problem:

The scrolling or magnifying glass function does not work. Solution:

Check the mouse driver in the Device Manager window, and make sure that the PS/2 TrackPoint driver is installed. Standby or hibernation problems Problem:

The computer enters standby mode unexpectedly. Solution:

If the processor overheats, the computer automatically enters standby mode to allow the computer to cool and to protect the processor and other internal components. Also, check the settings for standby mode, using Power Manager. Problem:

The computer enters standby mode immediately after Power-on self-test

(POST) (the standby indicator light turns on). Solution:

Make sure that:

v The battery is charged. v The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. Refer to Specifications on page 7. If these items are correct, have the computer serviced. Problem:

The critical low-battery error message is displayed, and the computer immediately turns off. Solution:

The battery power is getting low. Connect the ac adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 23 Solving computer problems Problem:

When you take action to return from standby mode, the computer display remains blank. Solution:

Check whether an external monitor was disconnected while the computer was in standby mode. Do not disconnect the external monitor while the computer is in standby mode or hibernation mode. If no external monitor is attached when the computer resumes, the computer display remains blank and output is not displayed. This restriction does not depend on the resolution value. Press Fn+F7 to bring up the computer display. Note: If you use the Fn+F7 key combination to apply a presentation scheme, press Fn+F7 at least three times in three seconds, and the image is displayed on the computer screen. Problem:

The computer does not return from standby mode, or the standby indicator stays on and the computer does not work. Solution:

If the system does not return from standby mode, it may have entered standby or hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the standby indicator. v If the standby indicator is on, your computer is in standby mode. Connect the ac adapter to the computer; then press Fn. If the standby indicator is off, your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state. Connect the ac adapter to the computer; then press power button to resume operation. v If the system still does not return from standby mode, your system may stop responding and you cannot turn off the computer. In this case, you need to reset the computer. If you have not saved your data, it may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the system is still not reset, remove the ac adapter and the battery. Problem:

Your computer does not enter standby or hibernation mode. Solution:

Check whether any option has been selected that would disable your computer from entering standby or hibernation mode. Problem:

The system does not wake up at the time set on the timer, if the computer is not connected to an ac power source, -or- The system does not enter hibernation mode from suspend mode, if the computer is not connected to an ac power source. 24 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Solution:

Solving computer problems The timer-wake-with-battery-operation is disabled by default. If you enable this function, the computer could wake up and begin running while it is being carried; this could lead to damage to the hard disk drive. With this risk in mind, you can enable the timer-wake-with-battery-

operation. 1. Turn your computer off and then on again; then, while the message, To interrupt normal startup, press the ThinkVantage button is displayed at the lower left of the screen, press the ThinkVantage button. Rescue and Recovery screen opens. 2. Click Access BIOS. The System Restart Required window is displayed. 3. Click Yes. The computer restarts, and the BIOS Setup Utility menu appears. 4. With the cursor key, select Config; then press Enter. The Power submenu is displayed. 5. Select Timer Wake with Battery Operation by pressing Enter. 6. With the F5 or F6 key, select Enabled; then press Enter. 7. Press F10 and Enter to save this setting and exit this utility. For information about the BIOS Setup Utility, see BIOS Setup Utility in Access Help, your on-board help system. Problem:

The Fn+F12 key combination does not cause the computer to enter hibernation mode. Solution:

The computer cannot enter hibernation mode:

v If you are using one of the supported communication PC Cards. To enter hibernation mode, stop the communication program, and then remove the PC Card or disable the PC Card slot. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar (for Windows XP) or the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon in the taskbar (for Windows 2000). If the hibernation mode is not enabled. To enable it, do as follows:

v 1. Start the ThinkPad Configuration Program. 2. Click Power Management. 3. Click the Hibernate tab. 4. Select the hibernate support checkbox. 5. Click OK. Note: You can enter hibernation mode by pressing Fn+F12 only if the PM driver has been installed. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 25 Solving computer problems Computer screen problems Problem:

The screen is blank. Solution:

v Press Fn+F7 to bring up the image. Note: If you use the Fn+F7 key combination to apply a presentation scheme, press Fn+F7 at least three times in three seconds, and the image is displayed on the computer screen. If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on (is green), press Fn+Home to make the screen brighter. If the standby status indicator is on (is green), press Fn to resume from the standby mode. If the problem persists, do the Solution in the problem below. v v v Problem:

The screen is unreadable or distorted. Solution:

Make sure that:

v The display device driver is installed correctly. v The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set. v The monitor type is correct. To check these settings, do as follows:

Open the Display Properties window. 1. Click the Settings tab. 2. Check whether the screen resolution and color quality are correctly set. 3. Click Advanced. 4. Click the Adapter tab. 5. Make sure ATI xxxxx or Intel 915GM is shown in the adapter information window. Note: The device driver name xxxxx depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer. 6. Click the Properties button. Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly. If not, click the Troubleshooter button. 7. Click the Monitor tab. 8. Make sure the information is correct. 9. Click the Properties button. Check the Device status box and make sure the device is working properly. If not, click the Troubleshooter button. 26 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Solving computer problems Problem:

The screen stays on even after you turn off your computer. Solution:

Press and hold the power switch for 4 seconds or more to turn off your computer; then turn it on again. Problem:

Missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time you turn on your computer. Solution:

This is an intrinsic characteristic of the TFT technology. Your computers display contains multiple thin-film transistors (TFTs). A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen might exist all the time. Problem:

A message, Unable to create overlay window, appears when you try to start DVD playback. or You get poor or no playback while running video playback, DVD playback, or game applications. Solution Do either of the following:

v v If you are using 32-bit color mode, change the color depth to 16-bit mode. If you are using a desktop size of 12801024 or larger, reduce the desktop size and the color depth. Battery problems Problem:

The battery cannot be fully charged by the power-off method in the standard charge time for your computer. Solution:

The battery might be over-discharged. Do the following:

1. Turn off the computer. 2. Make sure that the over-discharged battery is in the computer. 3. Connect the ac adapter to the computer and let it charge. If the optional Quick Charger is available, use it to charge the over-discharged battery. If the battery cannot be fully charged in 24 hours, use a new battery. Problem:

Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 27 Solving computer problems or Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. Solution:

Discharge and recharge the battery. Problem:

The operating time for a fully charged battery is short. Solution:

Discharge and recharge the battery. If your batterys operating time is still short, use a new battery. Problem:

The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. Solution:

The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. Problem The battery does not charge. Solution You cannot charge the battery when it is too hot. If the battery feels hot, remove it from the computer and allow it to cool to room temperature. After it cools, reinstall it and recharge the battery. If it still cannot be charged, have it serviced. Hard disk drive problems Problem:

The hard disk drive makes a rattling noise intermittently. Solution:

The rattling noise might be heard when:

v The hard disk drive starts accessing the data or when it stops. v You are carrying the hard disk drive. v You are carrying your computer. This is a normal characteristic of a hard disk drive and is not a defect. Problem:

The hard disk drive does not work. Solution:

In the startup menu in the BIOS Setup Utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot priority order list. If it is included in the Excluded from boot order list, it is disabled. Select the entry for it in the list and press the x key. This moves the entry to the Boot priority order list. 28 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide A startup problem Solving computer problems Problem:

The Microsoft Windows operating system will not start. Solution:

Use the Rescue and Recovery workspace to help solve or identify your problem. To open Rescue and Recovery, do the following:

1. Turn off your PC, then turn it on again. 2. Watch the screen carefully while your PC starts. When the To interrupt normal startup, press the ThinkVantage button message is displayed at the lower left of the screen, press the ThinkVantage button. The Rescue and Recovery workspace opens. A window such as this will appear:

3. After the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens, you can do the following:

v Rescue and Restore your files, folders, or backups. v Configure your system settings and passwords. v Communicate by using the internet and link to the Lenovo support site. v Troubleshoot and diagnose problems using diagnostics. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 29 Solving computer problems In the top panel of the Rescue and Recovery workspace, you can click the following to open other pages or exit the utility:

v Event Viewer enables you to view a log that contains information about events, or tasks, associated with Rescue and Recovery operations. v System Information enables you to see key hardware and software information about your computer. This information might be valuable when trying to diagnose problems. v Warranty Status enables you to see when your warranty expires, the terms of service for your computer, or list of replacement parts. v Help provides information about the various functions available in the Rescue and Recovery workspace. v Restart closes the Rescue and Recovery workspace and resumes the startup sequence that was interrupted. Fingerprint authentication problems If your finger(s) have any of the following conditions, you may not be able to register or authenticate it:

v Your finger is wrinkled. v Your finger is rough, dry or injured. v Your finger is very dry. v Your finger is stained with dirt, mud, or oil. v The surface of your finger is very different from when you registered your fingerprint. v Your finger is wet. v A finger is used that has not been enrolled. To improve the situation, try the following:

v Clean or wipe your hands to remove any excess dirt or moisture from the fingers. v Enroll and use a different finger for authentication. v If your hands are too dry, apply lotion to them. Other problems Problem:

The computer locks or does not accept any input. Solution:

Your computer might lock when it enters standby mode during a communication operation. Disable the standby timer when you are working on the network. To turn off the computer, press and hold the power switch for 4 seconds or more. 30 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Problem:

Solving computer problems The computer does not start from a device you want, such as a diskette drive. Solution:

Refer to the Startup menu of the BIOS Setup Utility. Make sure that the startup sequence in the BIOS Setup Utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want. Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is enabled. In the startup menu in the BIOS Setup Utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot priority order list. If it is included in the Excluded from boot order list, it is disabled. Select the entry for it in the list and press the x key. This moves the entry to the Boot priority order list. Problem:

The computer does not respond. Solution:

IRQs for the PCI are all set as 11. The computer does not respond because it cannot share the IRQ with other devices. Refer to the ThinkPad Configuration Program. Problem:

The computer can not play a CD, or the sound quality is not good. Solution:

Be sure that the disk meets the standards for your country. Usually, a disk that meets the local standards is marked with a CD logo on the label. If you use a disc that does not meet these standards, we cannot guarantee that it will play, or that, if it does play, the sound quality will be good. Problem:

Playback of DVD is not smooth in Windows 2000. Solution:

If you select the Maximum Battery mode for the Intel SpeedStep technology, this problem may occur. This mode is designed to achieve maximum battery life by switching the processor speed between the regular low speed and half of that speed, depending on how much the processor is used. If the use increases, Intel SpeedStep switches the processor speed to the lower speed. Operation in this mode can severely degrade the performance of the processor, and thus cause the playback of a DVD to be jerky. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 31 Solving computer problems To avoid or reduce this problem, you can choose any of three other modes of operation, as follows:

v Maximum Performance: Keeps the processor speed high at all times. v Automatic: Switches the processor speed between high and low, depending on how much the processor is used. If the use increases, Intel SpeedStep switches the processor speed to high. v Battery Optimized Performance: Keeps the processor speed low at all times. To choose a mode, do the following:

1. Start the ThinkPad Configuration Program. 2. Click Power Management. 3. Click the Intel SpeedStep technology tab. 4. From the list, select the mode you want. 5. Click OK. Problem:

You cannot connect using the built-in wireless networking card. Solution:

If the computer display is closed, open it and try again. Problem:

The computer cannot connect to the local network, shared devices or network printers, but can connect to the Internet. Solution:

On your desktop, click the Symantec Client Security icon, then click the Symantec Home and Office Networking Wizard icon and follow the instructions. Problem:

If your operating system is Windows 2000 and you are using a USB 1.x device, then when your computer returns from standby or hibernation mode to normal operation, the Unsafe Removal of Device message may appear. Solution:

You can safely close this message. It is displayed because of the USB 2.0 driver problem on Windows 2000. You can get detailed information in the More Information section of the Microsoft Knowledge Base 328580 and 323754. Visit the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http://support.microsoft.com/, type the number of the knowledge base article you need in the search field, and click the Search button. Problem:

An application does not run correctly. Solution:

32 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Solving computer problems Make sure that the problem is not being caused by the application. Check that your computer has the minimum required memory to run the application. Refer to the manuals supplied with the application. Check the following:

v The application is designed to operate with your operating system. v Other applications run correctly on your computer. v The necessary device drivers are installed. v The application works when it is run on some other computer. If an error message appears while you are using the application program, refer to the manuals supplied with the application. On some models, the following application programs may not run correctly. Download the latest version from the Web site listed below:

v ThinkPad 2.5 inch Hard Disk Drive Firmware Update Utility (version released before January 24, 2005): The latest version is available at http://www.lenovo.com/think/support v Drive Fitness Test (v3.99 or earlier): The latest version is available at http://www.hitachigst.com/hdd/support/download.htm Notes:

1. Lenovo does not guarantee the proper operation of the Drive Fitness Test. 2. To use an additional hard disk drive, update the firmware to the latest version. If the application still does not run correctly, contact your place of purchase or a service representative for help. Starting BIOS Setup Utility Your computer provides a program, called BIOS Setup Utility, that enables you to select various setup parameters. v Config: Set the configuration of your computer. v Date/Time: Set the date and time. v Security: Set security features. v Startup: Set the startup device. v Restart: Restart the system. Note: You can set many of these parameters more easily by using the ThinkPad Configuration Program. To start BIOS Setup Utility, do as follows:

Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 33 Starting BIOS Setup Utility 1. To protect yourself against accidental loss of data, back up your data and computer registry. For details see Data backup-and-restore tools in Access Help, your on-board help. 2. Remove any diskette from the diskette drive, and then turn off the computer. 3. Turn on the computer; then, while the message, To interrupt normal startup, press the ThinkVantage button is displayed at the lower left of the screen, press the ThinkVantage button. The Rescue and Recovery workspace opens. 4. Click ThinkVantage. The System Restart Required window is displayed. 5. Click Yes. The computer restarts, and the BIOS Setup Utility menu appears. If you have set a supervisor password, the BIOS Setup Utility menu appears after you enter the password. You can start the utility by pressing Enter instead of entering the supervisor password; however, you cannot change the parameters that are protected by the supervisor password. For more information, refer to the on-board help. 6. Using the cursor keys, move to an item you want to change. When the item you want is highlighted, press Enter. A submenu is displayed. 7. Change the items you wish to change. To change the value of an item, use the F5 or F6 key. If the item has a submenu, you can display it by pressing Enter. 8. Press F3 or Esc to exit from the submenu. If you are in a nested submenu, press Esc repeatedly until you reach the BIOS Setup Utility menu. Note: If you need to restore the settings to their original state as of the time of purchase, press F9 key to load the default settings. You can also select an option in the Restart submenu to load the default settings or discard the changes. 9. Select Restart; then press Enter. Move the cursor to the option you want for restarting your computer; then press Enter. Your computer restarts. Recovering pre-installed software Your computer hard disk has a hidden, protected area for backups. Contained within this area is a complete backup of the hard disk as it was shipped from the factory and a program called ThinkVantage Rescue and Recovery. If you performed a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program, you also have one or more backups stored that reflect the contents of the hard disk as it existed at various points in time. These backups might be stored on your hard disk, or a network drive, or on removable media, depending on the options you selected during the backup operation. 34 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Recovering pre-installed software You can use either the Rescue and Recovery program or the Rescue and Recovery workspace to restore the contents of the hard disk to an earlier state using any of the stored backups. The Rescue and Recovery workspace runs independently of the Windows operating system. Therefore, you can start it by pressing the ThinkVantage button when prompted during startup. After the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens you can perform a recovery operation, even if you are unable to start Windows. For more information about using Rescue and Recovery features, see Data backup-and-restore tools or Introducing Rescue and Recovery in Access Help. To recover the hard disk to its original contents, do the following:

Notes:

1. If the optical drive is not attached to your ThinkPad computer during recovery, DVD software and CD-recording software will not be installed. To ensure that they will be installed correctly, install the optical drive in the Ultrabay Slim or Ultrabay Enhanced before performing a recovery operation. 2. The recovery process might take up to 2 hours. Attention: All of the files on the primary hard disk partition (usually drive C) will be lost in the recovery process. However, before any data is overwritten, you will be given the opportunity to save one or more files to other media. 1. 2. Turn off your computer for at least 5 seconds. 3. Turn on your computer. Watch the display carefully. While the message, If possible, save all your files and shut down your operating system. To interrupt normal startup, press the ThinkVantage button is displayed at the lower left of the screen, press the ThinkVantage button. The Rescue and Recovery workspace opens. 4. Click Restore your system. 5. Click Restore my hard drive to the original factory state and then click Next. 6. Follow the instructions on the screen. 7. When the recovery process finishes, press the Enter key. Your computer will restart with the pre-installed operating system, drivers, and software. Upgrading the hard disk drive You can increase the storage capacity of your computer by replacing the hard disk drive with one of greater capacity. You can purchase a new hard disk drive from your reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 35 Upgrading the hard disk drive Notes:

1. Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and bay of the hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping. 2. The Rescue and Recovery program and the Product Recovery program are not included on an optional hard disk drive. Attention Handling a hard disk drive v Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs the physical shock. v Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive. v Do not touch the connector. The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data on the hard disk. Before removing the hard disk drive, make a backup copy of all the information on the hard disk, and then turn the computer off. Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in standby mode, or in hibernation mode. To replace the hard disk drive for a ThinkPad Z60t Series computer, do the following:

1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac adapter and all cables from the computer. 2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the screw that secures the hard disk drive bay cover and remove the cover. 36 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Upgrading the hard disk drive 5. Remove the hard disk drive by pulling on the tab. 6. Detach the side covers from the hard disk drive. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 37 Upgrading the hard disk drive 7. Attach the side covers to a new hard disk drive. 8. Insert the hard disk drive into the hard disk drive bay; then firmly install it. 9. Replace the hard disk drive bay cover and reinstall the screw. 10. Reinstall the battery. 11. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac adapter and the cables to the computer. To replace the hard disk drive for a ThinkPad Z60m Series computer, do the following:

1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac adapter and all cables from the computer. 2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the screw that secures the hard disk drive bay cover. 5. Remove the cover. 38 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Upgrading the hard disk drive 6. Disconnect the hard disk drive by pulling on the tab. 7. Remove the hard disk drive from the bay. 8. Detach the side covers from the hard disk drive. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 39 Upgrading the hard disk drive 9. Attach the side covers to a new hard disk drive. 10. Insert the new hard disk drive into the hard disk drive bay; then firmly install it. 11. Replace the hard disk drive bay cover and reinstall the screw. 12. Reinstall the battery. 13. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac adapter and the cables to the computer. Replacing the battery 1. Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Then disconnect the ac adapter and all cables from the computer. Note: If you are using a PC Card, the computer might not be able to enter hibernation mode. If this happens, turn off the computer. 2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3. Unlock the battery latch by sliding it to the left 1. Then remove the battery2. 4. Install a fully charged battery. Press the battery firmly into the connector until you hear a click. 40 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Replacing the battery 5. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac adapter and the cables to the computer. Chapter 2. Solving computer problems 41 Replacing the battery 42 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Chapter 3. Getting help and service Getting help and service . Getting help on the Web . 44

. 44 Calling the Customer Support Center Getting help around the world . 44

. 46 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 43 Getting help and service Getting help and service If you need help, service, technical assistance, or just want more information about ThinkPad computers, you will find a wide variety of sources available from Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional information about ThinkPad computers, what to do if you experience a problem with your computer, and whom to call for service should it be necessary. Microsoft Service Packs are the latest software source for Windows product updates. They are available via Web download (connection charges may apply) or via CD-ROM. For more specific information and links, go to www.microsoft.com. For technical assistance with installation of, or questions related to, Service Packs for your preloaded Microsoft Windows product, refer to the Microsoft Product Support Services Web site at http://support.microsoft.com/directory/, or you can contact Customer Support Center at the phone number(s) listed in Worldwide telephone list on page 72. Some fees might apply. Getting help on the Web The Lenovo Web site on the World Wide Web has up-to-date information about ThinkPad computers and support. The address for the Personal Computing home page is www.lenovo.com/think You can find support information for your ThinkPad computer at www.lenovo.com/think/support. Research this Web site to learn how to solve problems, find new ways to use your computer, and learn about options that can make working with your ThinkPad computer even easier. Calling the Customer Support Center If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, during the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through the Customer Support Center. The following services are available during the warranty period:

v Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. v Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. v Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes (ECs) available that apply to your hardware. 44 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Getting help and service The following items are not covered:

v Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Note: All warranted parts contain a 7-character identification in the format FRU XXXXXXX Identification of software problem sources v v Configuration of BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade v Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers v v Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of application programs To determine if your machine is in warranty and when the warranty expires, go to www.lenovo.com/think/support, and click Warranty, then follow the instructions on the screen. Refer to your Lenovo hardware warranty for a full explanation of Lenovo warranty terms. Be sure to retain your proof of purchase to obtain warranty service. If possible, be near your computer when you make your call in case the technical assistance representative needs to help you resolve a computer problem. Please ensure that you have downloaded the most current drivers and system updates, run diagnostics, and recorded information before you call. When calling for technical assistance, please have the following information available:

v Machine Type and Model v Serial numbers of your computer, monitor, and other components, or your v Description of the problem v Exact wording of any error messages v Hardware and software configuration information for your system proof of purchase The telephone numbers for your Customer Support Center location are located in the Worldwide telephone list section of this guide. Note: Telephone numbers are subject to change without notice. For the latest list of Customer Support Center telephone numbers and hours of operation, visit the Support Web site at www.lenovo.com/think/support. If the number for your country or region is not listed, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Chapter 3. Getting help and service 45 Getting help and service Getting help around the world If you travel with your computer or relocate it to a country where your ThinkPad machine type is sold, your computer might be eligible for International Warranty Service, which automatically entitles you to obtain warranty service throughout the warranty period. Service will be performed by service providers authorized to perform warranty service. Service methods and procedures vary by country, and some services might not be available in all countries. International Warranty Service is delivered through the method of service (such as depot, carry-in, or on-site service) that is provided in the servicing country. Service centers in certain countries might not be able to service all models of a particular machine type. In some countries, fees and restrictions might apply at the time of service. To determine whether your computer is eligible for International Warranty Service and to view a list of the countries where service is available, go to www.lenovo.com/think/support, click Warranty, and follow the instructions on the screen. 46 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Appendix A. Wireless related information Wireless interoperability Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Adapter is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum

(DSSS) and/or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:

v The IEEE 802.11a/b/g Standard on Wireless LANs, as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. v The Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification as defined by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance). Bluetooth Daughter Card is designed to be interoperable with any Bluetooth product that is compliant to Bluetooth Specification 2.0 + EDR as defined by the Bluetooth SIG. The following profiles are supported by Bluetooth Daughter Card:

v Generic Access v Service Discovery v Serial Port v Dial-up Networking v FAX v LAN Access using PPP v Personal Area Network v Generic Object Exchange v Generic Object Push v File Transfer v Synchronization v Audio Gateway v Headset v Printer v Human Interface Devices (Keyboard/Mouse) v Basic Image v Handsfree v AV Usage environment and your health Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Adapter and Bluetooth Daughter Card emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices. However, the level of energy emitted is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 47 Because Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Adapter and Bluetooth Daughter Card operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Lenovo believes the integrated wireless cards are safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situation or environment, the use of Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Adapter or Bluetooth Daughter Card may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations may for example include:

v Using the integrated wireless cards on board of airplanes, or in hospitals v In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization (e.g. airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use Wireless LAN Mini-PCI Adapter or Bluetooth Daughter Card prior to turning on the ThinkPad computer. Authorized Operation Within the United States and Canada The statement below regarding the extended channel mode is applicable when the system supports this function. To check the support of this function, please see the property of the installed wireless card by referring to the extended channel mode enablement instruction. For systems with 802.11b wireless function supporting Extended Channel Mode:

This device may only be used with Access Points, which are authorized for use within the geography in which they are being used. The use of this device with an Access Point that is not Wi-Fi compliant and not authorized to be used in your geography could result in violation of government regulations. Consult the network administrator, the instruction manual, or the approval label for the Access Point to determine the authorization of your Access Point in your specific country or geographic region. Extended Channel Mode should only be selected when the device is operated outside the USA and Canada to avoid the unlikely possibility of unauthorized operation. The use of this device outside the United States and Canada in Extended Channel Mode may use frequencies not authorized for use in the United States and Canada. When used with an authorized Wireless 48 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Access Point that is Wi-Fi compliant or in Ad Hoc mode, this device will operate in its authorized modes in all geographies. Please reconfigure selected frequencies when you travel from one country to another. Enabling Extended Channel Mode The statement below regarding the extended channel mode is applicable when the system supports this function. To check the support of this function, please see the property of the installed wireless card by referring to the extended channel mode enablement instruction. In countries other than the United States and Canada, extra IEEE 802.11b channels may be supported. If you have a problem to connect an Access Point, please contact your system administrator or check your Access Point to know which channel is used. And if the 802.11b channel is 12 or greater, you will need to enable Extended Channel Mode with next steps. 1. Start Windows 2000/XP. Logon with administrative privileges. 2. Right mouse click on My computer on Desktop and select Property. 3. Click on Hardware Tab and push Device Manager Button. 4. Double-click on Network Adapter, locate a wireless adapter device, right mouse click on the device and select Property. 5. Click on Advanced Tab. 6. Select Extended Channel Mode and set the value to Enable. Note: This will be applied for systems with 802.11b wireless function supporting Extended Channel Mode. Appendix A. Wireless related information 49 50 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Appendix B. Warranty information Lenovo Statement of Limited Warranty LSOLW-00 05/2005 Part 1 - General Terms This Statement of Limited Warranty includes Part 1 - General Terms, Part 2 -

Country-unique Terms, and Part 3 - Warranty Information. The terms of Part 2 replace or modify those of Part 1. The warranties provided by Lenovo Group Limited or one of its subsidiaries (called Lenovo) in this Statement of Limited Warranty apply only to Machines you purchase for your use, and not for resale. The term Machine means a Lenovo machine, its options, features, conversions, upgrades or peripheral products, or any combination of them. The term Machine does not include any software programs, whether pre-loaded with the Machine, installed subsequently or otherwise. Nothing in this Statement of Limited Warranty affects any statutory rights of consumers that cannot be waived or limited by contract. What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Machine 1) is free from defects in materials and workmanship and 2) conforms to Lenovos Official Published Specifications

(Specifications) which are available on request. The warranty period for the Machine starts on the original date of installation and is specified in Part 3 -

Warranty Information. The date on your invoice or sales receipt is the date of installation unless Lenovo or your reseller informs you otherwise. Unless Lenovo specifies otherwise, these warranties apply only in the country or region in which you purchased the Machine. THESE WARRANTIES ARE YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTIES AND REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 51 What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:

v any software programs, whether pre-loaded or shipped with the Machine, v or installed subsequently;

failure resulting from misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, or improper maintenance by you;

failure caused by a product for which Lenovo is not responsible; and v v any non-Lenovo products, including those that Lenovo may procure and provide with or integrate into a Lenovo Machine at your request. The warranty is voided by removal or alteration of identification labels on the Machine or its parts. Lenovo does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of a Machine. Any technical or other support provided for a Machine under warranty, such as assistance with "how-to" questions and those regarding Machine set-up and installation, is provided WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND. How to Obtain Warranty Service Warranty service may be provided by Lenovo, IBM, your reseller if authorized to perform warranty service, or an authorized warranty service provider. Each of them is referred to as a Service Provider. If the Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Service Provider. If you do not register the Machine with Lenovo, you may be required to present proof of purchase as evidence of your entitlement to warranty service. What Lenovo Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider for service, you must follow the problem determination and resolution procedures that we specify. An initial diagnosis of your problem can be made either by a technician over the telephone or electronically by access to a support website. The type of warranty service applicable to your Machine is specified in Part 3

- Warranty Information. You are responsible for downloading and installing designated software updates from a support web site or from other electronic media, and following the instructions that your Service Provider provides. Software updates may include basic input/output system code (called BIOS), utility programs, device drivers, and other software updates. 52 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide If your problem can be resolved with a Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU)

(e.g., keyboard, mouse, speaker, memory, hard disk drive), your Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If the Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period and your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone or electronically, through your application of software updates, or with a CRU, your Service Provider, will either, at its discretion, 1) repair it to make it function as warranted, or 2) replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If your Service Provider is unable to do either, you may return the Machine to your place of purchase and your money will be refunded. As part of the warranty service, your Service Provider may also install selected engineering changes that apply to the Machine. Exchange of a Machine or Part When the warranty service involves the exchange of a Machine or part, the item your Service Provider replaces becomes Lenovos property and the replacement becomes yours. You represent that all removed items are genuine and unaltered. The replacement may not be new, but will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the item replaced. The replacement assumes the warranty service status of the replaced item. Your Additional Responsibilities Before your Service Provider exchanges a Machine or part, you agree to remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not under warranty service. You also agree to:

1. ensure that the Machine is free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its exchange;

2. obtain authorization from the owner to have your Service Provider service a Machine that you do not own; and 3. where applicable, before service is provided:

a. follow the service request procedures that your Service Provider provides;

b. backup or secure all programs, data, and funds contained in the Machine; and 4. c. provide your Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to permit Lenovo to fulfill its obligations.

(a) ensure all information about identified or identifiable individuals

(Personal Data) is deleted from the Machine (to the extent technically possible), (b) allow your Service Provider or a supplier to process on your behalf any remaining Personal Data as your Service Provider considers necessary to fulfill its obligations under this Statement of Limited Warranty (which may include shipping the Machine for such processing to Appendix B. Warranty information 53 other service locations around the world), and (c) ensure that such processing complies with any laws applicable to such Personal Data. Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss of, or damage to, your Machine only while it is 1) in your Service Providers possession or 2) in transit in those cases where Lenovo is responsible for the transportation charges. Neither Lenovo nor your Service Provider are responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary or personal information contained in a Machine which you return for any reason. You should remove all such information from the Machine prior to its return. Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on Lenovos part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from Lenovo. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from Lenovo (including fundamental breach, negligence, misrepresentation, or other contract or tort claim), except for any liability that cannot be waived or limited by applicable laws, Lenovo is liable for no more than 1. damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property 2. and tangible personal property for which Lenovo is legally liable; and the amount of any other actual direct damages, up to the charges for the Machine that is subject of the claim. This limit also applies to Lenovos suppliers, resellers and your Service Provider. It is the maximum for which Lenovo, its suppliers, resellers, and your Service Provider are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS LENOVO, ITS SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES (OTHER THAN THOSE UNDER THE FIRST ITEM LISTED ABOVE); 2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; OR 4) LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Governing Law Both you and Lenovo consent to the application of the laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine to govern, interpret, and enforce all of your 54 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide and Lenovos rights, duties, and obligations arising from, or relating in any manner to, the subject matter of this Statement of Limited Warranty, without regard to conflict of law principles. THESE WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. Jurisdiction All of our rights, duties, and obligations are subject to the courts of the country in which you acquired the Machine. Part 2 - Country-unique Terms AMERICAS ARGENTINA Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the Ordinary Commercial Court of the city of Buenos Aires. BOLIVIA Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the courts of the city of La Paz. BRAZIL Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the court of Rio de Janeiro, RJ. CHILE Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the Civil Courts of Justice of Santiago. COLOMBIA Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the Judges of the Republic of Colombia. ECUADOR Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the Judges of Quito. Appendix B. Warranty information 55 MEXICO Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the Federal Courts of Mexico City, Federal District. PARAGUAY Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the courts of the city of Asuncion. PERU Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the Judges and Tribunals of the Judicial District of Lima, Cercado. Limitation of Liability: The following is added at the end of this section:

In accordance with Article 1328 of the Peruvian Civil Code the limitations and exclusions specified in this section will not apply to damages caused by Lenovos willful misconduct (dolo) or gross negligence (culpa inexcusable). URUGUAY Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the City of Montevideo Courts Jurisdiction. VENEZUELA Jurisdiction: The following is added after the first sentence:

Any litigation arising from this Statement of Limited Warranty will be settled exclusively by the Courts of the Metropolitan Area Of the City of Caracas. NORTH AMERICA How to Obtain Warranty Service: The following is added to this Section:

To obtain warranty service from IBM service in Canada or the United States, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (426-7378). CANADA Limitation of Liability: The following replaces item 1 of this section:

1. damages for bodily injury (including death) or physical harm to real property and tangible personal property caused by Lenovos negligence; and Governing Law: The following replaces "laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine" in the first sentence:

laws in the Province of Ontario. 56 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide UNITED STATES Governing Law: The following replaces "laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine" in the first sentence:

laws of the State of New York. ASIA PACIFIC AUSTRALIA What this Warranty Covers: The following paragraph is added to this section:

The warranties specified in this Section are in addition to any rights you may have under the Trade Practices Act 1974 or other similar legislation and are only limited to the extent permitted by the applicable legislation. Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this section:

Where Lenovo is in breach of a condition or warranty implied by the Trade Practices Act 1974 or other similar legislation, Lenovos liability is limited to the repair or replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods. Where that condition or warranty relates to right to sell, quiet possession or clear title, or the goods are of a kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption, then none of the limitations in this paragraph apply. Governing Law: The following replaces "laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine in the first sentence:

laws of the State or Territory. CAMBODIA AND LAOS Governing Law: The following replaces "laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine" in the first sentence:

laws of the State of New York, United States of America. CAMBODIA, INDONESIA, AND LAOS Arbitration: The following is added under this heading:

Disputes arising out of or in connection with this Statement of Limited Warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration which shall be held in Singapore in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center (SIAC Rules) then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding for the parties without appeal and shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. The number of arbitrators shall be three, with each side to the dispute being entitled to appoint one arbitrator. The two arbitrators appointed by the parties shall appoint a third arbitrator who shall act as chairman of the proceedings. Vacancies in the post of chairman shall be filled by the president of the SIAC. Appendix B. Warranty information 57 Other vacancies shall be filled by the respective nominating party. Proceedings shall continue from the stage they were at when the vacancy occurred. If one of the parties refuses or otherwise fails to appoint an arbitrator within 30 days of the date the other party appoints its, the first appointed arbitrator shall be the sole arbitrator, provided that the arbitrator was validly and properly appointed. All proceedings shall be conducted, including all documents presented in such proceedings, in the English language. The English language version of this Statement of Limited Warranty prevails over any other language version. HONG KONG S.A.R. OF CHINA AND MACAU S.A.R. OF CHINA Governing Law: The following replaces "laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine" in the first sentence:

laws of Hong Kong Special Administrative Region of China. INDIA Limitation of Liability: The following replaces items 1 and 2 of this section:

1. liability for bodily injury (including death) or damage to real property and tangible personal property will be limited to that caused by Lenovos negligence; and 2. as to any other actual damage arising in any situation involving nonperformance by Lenovo pursuant to, or in any way related to the subject of this Statement of Limited Warranty, the charge paid by you for the individual Machine that is the subject of the claim. Arbitration: The following is added under this heading Disputes arising out of or in connection with this Statement of Limited Warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration which shall be held in Bangalore, India in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding for the parties without appeal and shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. The number of arbitrators shall be three, with each side to the dispute being entitled to appoint one arbitrator. The two arbitrators appointed by the parties shall appoint a third arbitrator who shall act as chairman of the proceedings. Vacancies in the post of chairman shall be filled by the president of the Bar Council of India. Other vacancies shall be filled by the respective nominating party. Proceedings shall continue from the stage they were at when the vacancy occurred. 58 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide If one of the parties refuses or otherwise fails to appoint an arbitrator within 30 days of the date the other party appoints its, the first appointed arbitrator shall be the sole arbitrator, provided that the arbitrator was validly and properly appointed. All proceedings shall be conducted, including all documents presented in such proceedings, in the English language. The English language version of this Statement of Limited Warranty prevails over any other language version. JAPAN Governing Law: The following sentence is added to this section:

Any doubts concerning this Statement of Limited Warranty will be initially resolved between us in good faith and in accordance with the principle of mutual trust. MALAYSIA Limitation of Liability: The word SPECIAL in item 3 of the fifth paragraph is deleted. NEW ZEALAND What this Warranty Covers: The following paragraph is added to this section:

The warranties specified in this section are in addition to any rights you may have under the Consumer Guarantees Act 1993 or other legislation which cannot be excluded or limited. The Consumer Guarantees Act 1993 will not apply in respect of any goods which Lenovo provides, if you require the goods for the purposes of a business as defined in that Act. Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this section:

Where Machines are not acquired for the purposes of a business as defined in the Consumer Guarantees Act 1993, the limitations in this Section are subject to the limitations in that Act. PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA (PRC) Governing Law: The following replaces laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine in the first sentence:

laws of the State of New York, United States of America (except when local law requires otherwise). PHILIPPINES Limitation of Liability: Item 3 in the fifth paragraph is replaced by the following:

SPECIAL (INCLUDING NOMINAL AND EXEMPLARY DAMAGES), MORAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; OR Arbitration: The following is added: under this heading Disputes arising out of or in connection with this Statement of Limited Appendix B. Warranty information 59 Warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration which shall be held in Metro Manila, Philippines in accordance with the laws of the Philippines then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding for the parties without appeal and shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. The number of arbitrators shall be three, with each side to the dispute being entitled to appoint one arbitrator. The two arbitrators appointed by the parties shall appoint a third arbitrator who shall act as chairman of the proceedings. Vacancies in the post of chairman shall be filled by the president of the Philippine Dispute Resolution Center, Inc.. Other vacancies shall be filled by the respective nominating party. Proceedings shall continue from the stage they were at when the vacancy occurred. If one of the parties refuses or otherwise fails to appoint an arbitrator within 30 days of the date the other party appoints its, the first appointed arbitrator shall be the sole arbitrator, provided that the arbitrator was validly and properly appointed. All proceedings shall be conducted, including all documents presented in such proceedings, in the English language. The English language version of this Statement of Limited Warranty prevails over any other language version. SINGAPORE Limitation of Liability: The words SPECIAL and ECONOMIC in item 3 in the fifth paragraph are deleted. EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST, AFRICA (EMEA) THE FOLLOWING TERMS APPLY TO ALL EMEA COUNTRIES:

The terms of this Statement of Limited Warranty apply to Machines purchased from Lenovo or a Lenovo reseller. How to Obtain Warranty Service:

Add the following paragraph in Western Europe (Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, San Marino, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom, Vatican State, and any country subsequently added to the European Union, as from the date of accession):

The warranty for Machines acquired in Western Europe shall be valid and applicable in all Western Europe countries provided the Machines have been announced and made available in such countries. 60 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide If you purchase a Machine in one of the Western European countries, as defined above, you may obtain warranty service for that Machine in any of those countries from a Service Provider, provided the Machine has been announced and made available by Lenovo in the country in which you wish to obtain service. If you purchased a Personal Computer Machine in Albania, Armenia, Belarus, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Georgia, Hungary, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Federal Republic of Yugoslavia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia (FYROM), Moldova, Poland, Romania, Russia, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, or Ukraine, you may obtain warranty service for that Machine in any of those countries from a Service Provider, provided the Machine has been announced and made available by Lenovo in the country in which you wish to obtain service.. If you purchase a Machine in a Middle Eastern or African country, you may obtain warranty service for that Machine from a Service Provider within the country of purchase, provided the Machine has been announced and made available by Lenovo in that country. Warranty service in Africa is available within 50 kilometers of a Service Provider. You are responsible for transportation costs for Machines located outside 50 kilometers of a Service Provider. Governing Law:

The phrase "the laws of the country in which you acquired the Machine" is replaced by:

1) the laws of Austria in Albania, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Georgia, Hungary, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, FYR Macedonia, Moldova, Poland, Romania, Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Ukraine, Uzbekistan, and FR Yugoslavia; 2) the laws of France in Algeria, Benin, Burkina Faso, Cameroon, Cape Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Congo Republic, Djibouti, Democratic Republic of Congo, Equatorial Guinea, French Guiana, French Polynesia, Gabon, Gambia, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Ivory Coast, Lebanon, Madagascar, Mali, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Morocco, New Caledonia, Niger, Reunion, Senegal, Seychelles, Togo, Tunisia, Vanuatu, and Wallis & Futuna; 3) the laws of Finland in Estonia, Latvia, and Lithuania; 4) the laws of England in Angola, Bahrain, Botswana, Burundi, Egypt, Eritrea, Ethiopia, Ghana, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia, Malawi, Malta, Mozambique, Nigeria, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Rwanda, Sao Tome, Saudi Arabia, Sierra Leone, Somalia, Tanzania, Uganda, United Arab Emirates, the United Kingdom, West Bank/Gaza, Yemen, Zambia, and Zimbabwe; and 5) the laws of South Africa in South Africa, Namibia, Lesotho and Swaziland. Appendix B. Warranty information 61 Jurisdiction: The following exceptions are added to this section:

1) In Austria the choice of jurisdiction for all disputes arising out of this Statement of Limited Warranty and relating thereto, including its existence, will be the competent court of law in Vienna, Austria (Inner-City); 2) in Angola, Bahrain, Botswana, Burundi, Egypt, Eritrea, Ethiopia, Ghana, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia, Malawi, Malta, Mozambique, Nigeria, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Rwanda, Sao Tome, Saudi Arabia, Sierra Leone, Somalia, Tanzania, Uganda, United Arab Emirates, West Bank/Gaza, Yemen, Zambia, and Zimbabwe all disputes arising out of this Statement of Limited Warranty or related to its execution, including summary proceedings, will be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts; 3) in Belgium and Luxembourg, all disputes arising out of this Statement of Limited Warranty or related to its interpretation or its execution, the law, and the courts of the capital city, of the country of your registered office and/or commercial site location only are competent; 4) in France, Algeria, Benin, Burkina Faso, Cameroon, Cape Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Congo Republic, Djibouti, Democratic Republic of Congo, Equatorial Guinea, French Guiana, French Polynesia, Gabon, Gambia, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Ivory Coast, Lebanon, Madagascar, Mali, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Morocco, New Caledonia, Niger, Reunion, Senegal, Seychelles, Togo, Tunisia, Vanuatu, and Wallis & Futuna all disputes arising out of this Statement of Limited Warranty or related to its violation or execution, including summary proceedings, will be settled exclusively by the Commercial Court of Paris; 5) in Russia, all disputes arising out of or in relation to the interpretation, the violation, the termination, the nullity of the execution of this Statement of Limited Warranty shall be settled by Arbitration Court of Moscow; 6) in South Africa, Namibia, Lesotho and Swaziland, both of us agree to submit all disputes relating to this Statement of Limited Warranty to the jurisdiction of the High Court in Johannesburg; 7) in Turkey all disputes arising out of or in connection with this Statement of Limited Warranty shall be resolved by the Istanbul Central

(Sultanahmet) Courts and Execution Directorates of Istanbul, the Republic of Turkey; 8) in each of the following specified countries, any legal claim arising out of this Statement of Limited Warranty will be brought before, and settled exclusively by, the competent court of a) Athens for Greece, b) Tel Aviv-Jaffa for Israel, c) Milan for Italy, d) Lisbon for Portugal, and e) Madrid for Spain;

and 9) in the United Kingdom, both of us agree to submit all disputes relating to this Statement of Limited Warranty to the jurisdiction of the English courts. Arbitration: The following is added under this heading:

In Albania, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Georgia, Hungary, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, FYR Macedonia, Moldova, Poland, Romania, Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Ukraine, Uzbekistan, and FR Yugoslavia all disputes arising out of this Statement of Limited Warranty or related to its violation, 62 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide termination or nullity will be finally settled under the Rules of Arbitration and Conciliation of the International Arbitral Center of the Federal Economic Chamber in Vienna (Vienna Rules) by three arbitrators appointed in accordance with these rules. The arbitration will be held in Vienna, Austria, and the official language of the proceedings will be English. The decision of the arbitrators will be final and binding upon both parties. Therefore, pursuant to paragraph 598 (2) of the Austrian Code of Civil Procedure, the parties expressly waive the application of paragraph 595 (1) figure 7 of the Code. Lenovo may, however, institute proceedings in a competent court in the country of installation. In Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania all disputes arising in connection with this Statement of Limited Warranty will be finally settled in arbitration that will be held in Helsinki, Finland in accordance with the arbitration laws of Finland then in effect. Each party will appoint one arbitrator. The arbitrators will then jointly appoint the chairman. If arbitrators cannot agree on the chairman, then the Central Chamber of Commerce in Helsinki will appoint the chairman. EUROPEAN UNION (EU) THE FOLLOWING TERMS APPLY TO ALL EU COUNTRIES:

The warranty for Machines acquired in EU countries is valid and applicable in all EU countries provided the Machines have been announced and made available in such countries. How to Obtain Warranty Service: The following is added to this section:

To obtain warranty service from IBM service in EU countries, see the telephone listing in Part 3 - Warranty Information. You may contact IBM service at the following address:

IBM Warranty & Service Quality Dept. PO Box 30 Spango Valley Greenock Scotland PA16 0AH CONSUMERS Consumers have legal rights under applicable national legislation governing the sale of consumer goods. Such rights are not affected by the warranties provided in this Statement of Limited Warranty. AUSTRIA, DENMARK, FINLAND, GREECE, ITALY, NETHERLANDS, NORWAY, PORTUGAL, SPAIN, SWEDEN AND SWITZERLAND Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the terms of this section in its entirety:

Except as otherwise provided by mandatory law:

Appendix B. Warranty information 63 1. Lenovos liability for any damages and losses that may arise as a consequence of the fulfillment of its obligations under or in connection with this Statement of Limited Warranty or due to any other cause related to this Statement of Limited Warranty is limited to the compensation of only those damages and losses proved and actually arising as an immediate and direct consequence of the non-fulfillment of such obligations (if Lenovo is at fault) or of such cause, for a maximum amount equal to the charges you paid for the Machine. The above limitation shall not apply to damages for bodily injuries

(including death) and damages to real property and tangible personal property for which Lenovo is legally liable. 2. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS LENOVO, ITS SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY: 1) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA; 2) INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; 3) LOST PROFITS, EVEN IF THEY ARISE AS AN IMMEDIATE CONSEQUENCE OF THE EVENT THAT GENERATED THE DAMAGES; OR 4) LOSS OF BUSINESS, REVENUE, GOODWILL, OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. FRANCE AND BELGIUM Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the terms of this section in its entirety:

Except as otherwise provided by mandatory law:

1. Lenovos liability for any damages and losses that may arise as a consequence of the fulfillment of its obligations under or in connection with this Statement of Limited Warranty is limited to the compensation of only those damages and losses proved and actually arising as an immediate and direct consequence of the non-fulfillment of such obligations (if Lenovo is at fault), for a maximum amount equal to the charges you paid for the Machine that has caused the damages. The above limitation shall not apply to damages for bodily injuries

(including death) and damages to real property and tangible personal property for which Lenovo is legally liable. 2. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS LENOVO, ITS SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY: 1) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA; 2) INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; 3) LOST PROFITS, EVEN IF THEY ARISE AS AN IMMEDIATE CONSEQUENCE OF THE EVENT THAT GENERATED THE DAMAGES; OR 4) LOSS OF BUSINESS, REVENUE, GOODWILL, OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. 64 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide THE FOLLOWING TERMS APPLY TO THE COUNTRY SPECIFIED:

AUSTRIA The provisions of this Statement of Limited Warranty replace any applicable statutory warranties. What this Warranty Covers: The following replaces the first sentence of the first paragraph of this section:

The warranty for a Lenovo Machine covers the functionality of the Machine for its normal use and the Machines conformity to its Specifications. The following paragraphs are added to this section:

The limitation period for consumers in action for breach of warranty is the statutory period as a minimum. In case your Service Provider is unable to repair a Lenovo Machine, you can alternatively ask for a partial refund as far as justified by the reduced value of the unrepaired Machine or ask for a cancellation of the respective agreement for such Machine and get your money refunded. The second paragraph does not apply. What Lenovo Will Do to Correct Problems: The following is added to this section:

During the warranty period, Lenovo will reimburse you for the transportation charges for the delivery of the failing Machine to IBM Service. Limitation of Liability: The following paragraph is added to this section:

The limitations and exclusions specified in the Statement of Limited Warranty will not apply to damages caused by Lenovo with fraud or gross negligence and for express warranty. The following sentence is added to the end of item 2:

Lenovos liability under this item is limited to the violation of essential contractual terms in cases of ordinary negligence. EGYPT Limitation of Liability: The following replaces item 2 in this section:

as to any other actual direct damages, Lenovos liability will be limited to the total amount you paid for the Machine that is the subject of the claim. Applicability of suppliers, resellers, and Service Providers (unchanged). FRANCE Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the second sentence of the first paragraph of this section:

Appendix B. Warranty information 65 In such instances, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from Lenovo, Lenovo is liable for no more than: (items 1 and 2 unchanged). GERMANY What this Warranty Covers: The following replaces the first sentence of the first paragraph of this section:

The warranty for a Lenovo Machine covers the functionality of the Machine for its normal use and the Machines conformity to its Specifications. The following paragraphs are added to this section:

The minimum warranty period for Machines is twelve months. In case your Service Provider is unable to repair a Lenovo Machine, you can alternatively ask for a partial refund as far as justified by the reduced value of the unrepaired Machine or ask for a cancellation of the respective agreement for such Machine and get your money refunded. The second paragraph does not apply. What Lenovo Will Do to Correct Problems: The following is added to this section:

During the warranty period, transportation for delivery of the failing Machine to Lenovo or IBM service will be at Lenovos expense. Limitation of Liability: The following paragraph is added to this section:

The limitations and exclusions specified in the Statement of Limited Warranty will not apply to damages caused by Lenovo with fraud or gross negligence and for express warranty. The following sentence is added to the end of item 2:

Lenovos liability under this item is limited to the violation of essential contractual terms in cases of ordinary negligence. HUNGARY Limitation of Liability: The following is added at the end of this section:

The limitation and exclusion specified herein shall not apply to liability for a breach of contract damaging life, physical well-being, or health that has been caused intentionally, by gross negligence, or by a criminal act. The parties accept the limitations of liability as valid provisions and state that the Section 314.(2) of the Hungarian Civil Code applies as the acquisition price as well as other advantages arising out of the present Statement of Limited Warranty balance this limitation of liability. IRELAND What this Warranty Covers: The following is added to this section:

66 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Except as expressly provided in these terms and conditions, all statutory conditions, including all warranties implied, but without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing all warranties implied by the Sale of Goods Act 1893 or the Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act 1980 are hereby excluded. Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the terms of section in its entirety:

For the purposes of this section, a Default means any act, statement, omission, or negligence on the part of Lenovo in connection with, or in relation to, the subject matter of this Statement of Limited Warranty in respect of which Lenovo is legally liable to you, whether in contract or tort. A number of Defaults which together result in, or contribute to, substantially the same loss or damage will be treated as one Default occurring on the date of occurrence of the last such Default. Circumstances may arise where, because of a Default, you are entitled to recover damages from Lenovo. This section sets out the extent of Lenovos liability and your sole remedy. 1. Lenovo will accept unlimited liability for death or personal injury caused by the negligence of Lenovo. 2. Subject always to the Items for Which Lenovo is Not Liable below, Lenovo will accept unlimited liability for physical damage to your tangible property resulting from the negligence of Lenovo. 3. Except as provided in items 1 and 2 above, Lenovos entire liability for actual damages for any one Default will not in any event exceed 125% of the amount you paid for the Machine directly relating to the Default. Items for Which Lenovo is Not Liable Save with respect to any liability referred to in item 1 above, under no circumstances is Lenovo, its suppliers, resellers or Service Providers liable for any of the following, even if Lenovo or they were informed of the possibility of such losses:

1. 2. special, indirect, or consequential loss; or 3. loss of profits, business, revenue, goodwill, or anticipated savings. loss of, or damage to, data;

SLOVAKIA Limitation of Liability: The following is added to the end of the last paragraph:

The limitations apply to the extent they are not prohibited under 373-386 of the Slovak Commercial Code. SOUTH AFRICA, NAMIBIA, BOTSWANA, LESOTHO AND SWAZILAND Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this section:

Lenovos entire liability to you for actual damages arising in all situations Appendix B. Warranty information 67 involving nonperformance by Lenovo in respect of the subject matter of this Statement of Warranty will be limited to the charge paid by you for the individual Machine that is the subject of your claim from Lenovo. UNITED KINGDOM Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the terms of this section is in its entirety:

For the purposes of this section, a Default means any act, statement, omission, or negligence on the part of Lenovo in connection with, or in relation to, the subject matter of this Statement of Limited Warranty in respect of which Lenovo is legally liable to you, whether in contract or tort. A number of Defaults which together result in, or contribute to, substantially the same loss or damage will be treated as one Default. Circumstances may arise where, because of a Default, you are entitled to recover damages from Lenovo. This section sets out the extent of Lenovos liability and your sole remedy. 1. Lenovo will accept unlimited liability for:

a. death or personal injury caused by the negligence of Lenovo; and b. any breach of its obligations implied by Section 12 of the Sale of Goods Act 1979 or Section 2 of the Supply of Goods and Services Act 1982, or any statutory modification or re-enactment of either such Section. 2. Lenovo will accept unlimited liability, subject always to the Items for Which Lenovo is Not Liable below, for physical damage to your tangible property resulting from the negligence of Lenovo. 3. Lenovos entire liability for actual damages for any one Default will not in any event, except as provided in items 1 and 2 above, exceed 125% of the total purchase price payable or the charges for the Machine directly relating to the Default. These limits also apply to Lenovos suppliers, resellers and Service Providers. They state the maximum for which Lenovo and such suppliers, resellers and Service Providers are collectively responsible. Items for Which Lenovo is Not Liable Save with respect to any liability referred to in item 1 above, under no circumstances is Lenovo or any of its suppliers, resellers or Service Providers liable for any of the following, even if Lenovo or they were informed of the possibility of such losses:

1. 2. special, indirect, or consequential loss; or 3. loss of profits, business, revenue, goodwill, or anticipated savings. loss of, or damage to, data;

68 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Part 3 - Warranty Information This Part 3 provides information regarding the warranty applicable to your Machine, including the warranty period and type of warranty service Lenovo provides. Warranty Period The warranty period may vary by country or region and is specified in the table below. NOTE: Region means either Hong Kong or Macau Special Administrative Region of China. A warranty period of 3 years on parts and 1 year on labor means that Lenovo provides warranty service without charge for:

a. parts and labor during the first year of the warranty period; and b. parts only, on an exchange basis, in the second and third years of the warranty period. Your Service Provider will charge you for any labor provided in performance of the repair or replacement(s) in the second and third year of warranty period. ThinkPad Z60t Series computer Machine Type 2511 2512 2513 2514 All Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Country or Region of Purchase Warranty period US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia Japan Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Types of Warranty Service 6 1 7 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 Appendix B. Warranty information 69 ThinkPad Z60m Series computer Machine Type 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Country or Region of Purchase Warranty period US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia Japan Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year All US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, and Australia All other countries except the US, Canada, Brazil, Mexico, Japan, and Australia Japan Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Parts and Labor - 1 year Battery pack - 1 year 70 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Types of Warranty Service 6 1 7 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 7 1 6 1 Machine Type 2536 Country or Region of Purchase Warranty period All Parts and Labor - 3 years Battery pack - 1 year Types of Warranty Service 5 1 Types of Warranty Service If required, your Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your Machine in the above table and as described below. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call and is subject to parts availability. Service levels are response time objectives and are not guaranteed. The specified level of warranty service may not be available in all worldwide locations, additional charges may apply outside your Service Providers normal service area, contact your local Service Provider representative or your reseller for country and location specific information. 1. Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Lenovo will ship CRUs to you for you to install, Tier 1 CRUs are easy to install whereas Tier 2 CRUs require some technical skill and tools. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your Machine and are available from Lenovo at any time on your request. You may request that a Service Provider install CRUs, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty service designated for your Machine. Lenovo specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CRU whether a defective CRU must be returned. When return is required, 1) return instructions and a container are shipped with the replacement CRU, and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if Lenovo does not receive the defective CRU within 30 days of your receipt of the replacement. 2. On-site Service Your Service Provider will either repair or exchange the failing Machine at your location and verify its operation. You must provide suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the Lenovo Machine. The area must be clean, well lit and suitable for the purpose. For some Machines, certain repairs may require sending the Machine to a designated service center. 3. Courier or Depot Service *

You will disconnect the failing Machine for collection arranged by your Service Provider. A shipping container will be provided to you for you to return your Machine to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your Machine and deliver it to the designated service center. Following its repair or exchange, the service center will arrange the return delivery of the Machine to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification. Appendix B. Warranty information 71 4. Customer Carry-In or Mail-In Service You will deliver or mail as your Service Provider specifies (prepaid unless specified otherwise) the failing Machine suitably packaged to a designated location. After the Machine has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available for your collection or, for Mail-in Service, the Machine will be returned to you at Lenovos expense, unless your Service Provider specifies otherwise. You are responsible for the subsequent installation and verification of the Machine. 5. CRU and On-site Service This type of Warranty Service is a combination of Type 1 and Type 2 (see above). 6. CRU and Courier or Depot Service This type of Warranty Service is a combination of Type 1 and Type 3 (see above). 7. CRU and Customer Carry-In or Mail-In Service This type of Warranty Service is a combination of Type 1 and Type 4 (see above). When a 5, 6 or 7 type of warranty service is listed, your Service Provider will determine which type of warranty service is appropriate for the repair.

* This type of service is called ThinkPad EasyServ or EasyServ in some countries. To obtain warranty service contact a Service Provider. In Canada or the United States, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (426-7378). In other countries, see the telephone numbers below. Worldwide telephone list Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. For the most current phone numbers, go to http://www.lenovo.com/think/support and click Support phone list. Country or Region Africa Argentina Australia Austria Telephone Number Africa: +44 (0)1475 555 055 South Africa: +27 11 3028888 and 0800110756 Central Africa: Contact the nearest IBM Business Partner 0800-666-0011 (Spanish) 131-426 (English)

+43-1-24592-5901 (30 day up and running support) 01-211-454-610 (Warranty service and support)

(German) 72 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Country or Region Belgium Bolivia Brazil Canada Chile China China (Hong Kong S.A.R.) Colombia Costa Rica Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Telephone Number 02-210-9820 (30 day up and running support) 02-225-3611 (Warranty service and support) (Dutch) 02-210-9800 (30 day up and running support) 02-225-3611 (Warranty service and support) (French) 0800-0189 (Spanish) Sao Paulo region: (11) 3889-8986 Toll free outside Sao Paulo region: 0800-7014-815

(Brazilian Portuguese) 1-800-565-3344 (English, French) In Toronto only call: 416-383-3344 800-224-488 (Spanish) 800 810 1818 (Mandarin) Home PC: 852 2825 7799 Commercial PC: 852 8205 0333 ThinkPad and WorkPad: 852 2825 6580

(Cantonese, English, Putonghua) 1-800-912-3021 (Spanish) 284-3911 (Spanish) 0800-0426

+357-22-841100

+420-2-7213-1316 4520-8200 (30 day up and running support) 7010-5150 (Warranty service and support) (Danish) 566-4755 566-5161 ext. 8201 Toll Free within the Dominican Republic: 1-200-1929

(Spanish) 1-800-426911 (Spanish) 250-5696 (Spanish)

+386-61-1796-699 09-459-6960 (30 day up and running support)

+358-001-4260 (Warranty service and support) (Finnish) 0238-557-450 (30 day up and running support) 0810-631-213 (Hardware Warranty service and support) 0810-631-020 (Software Warranty service and support) (French) 07032-15-49201 (30 day up and running support) 01805-25-35-58 (Warranty service and support) (German)

+30-210-680-1700 Appendix B. Warranty information 73 Country or Region Guatemala Honduras Hungary India Indonesia Ireland Italy Japan Telephone Number 335-8490 (Spanish) Tegucigalpa & San Pedro Sula: 232-4222 San Pedro Sula: 552-2234

(Spanish)

+36-1-382-5720 1600-44-6666 Alternate Toll Free: +91-80-26788940

(English) 800-140-3555 (Bahasa, Indonesian, English) 01-815-9202 (30 day up and running support) 01-881-1444 (Warranty service and support) (English) 02-7031-6101 (30 day up and running support)

+39-800-820094 (Warranty service and support) (Italian) Desktop:

Toll free: 0120-887-870 For International: +81-46-266-4724 ThinkPad:

Toll free: 0120-887-874 For International: +81-46-266-4724 Both of the above numbers will be answered with a Japanese language voice prompt. For telephone support in English, please wait for the Japanese voice prompt to end, and an operator will answer. Please ask for English support please, and your call will be transferred to an English speaking operator. PC Software:

0120-558-695 Overseas calls: +81-44-200-8666

(Japanese) 1588-5801 (Korean)

+386-61-1796-699

+386-61-1796-699

+352-298-977-5063 (French) 1800-88-8558 (English/Bahasa Melayu)

+356-23-4175 001-866-434-2080 (Spanish)

+44 (0)1475-555-055

+31-20-514-5770 (Dutch) Korea Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malaysia Malta Mexico Middle East Netherlands 74 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Country or Region New Zealand Nicaragua Norway Panama Peru Philippines Poland Portugal Romania Russian Federation Singapore Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Turkey United Kingdom United States Uruguay Venezuela Vietnam Telephone Number 0800-446-149 (English) 255-6658 (Spanish) 6681-1100 (30 day up and running support) 8152-1550 (Warranty service and support) (Norwegian) 206-6047 (Spanish) 0-800-50-866 (Spanish) 1800-1888-1426 (English)

+63-2-995-8420 (Philipino)

+48-22-878-6999

+351-21-892-7147 (Portuguese)

+4-021-224-4015

+7-095-940-2000 (Russian) 1800-3172-888 (English/Bahasa/Melayu)

+421-2-4954-1217

+386-1-4796-699

+34-91-714-7983, +34-91-397-6503 (Spanish)

+94-11-2448-442 (English) 08-477-4420 (30 day up and running support) 077-117-1040 (Warranty service and support) (Swedish) 058-333-0900 (30 day up and running support) 0800-55-54-54 (Warranty service and support) (German/French/Italian) 886-2-8723-9799 (Mandarin) 1-800-299-229 (Thai) 00800-4463-2041 (Turkish) 01475-555-055 (30 day up and running support) 08705-500-900 (Hardware Warranty service and support) 08457-151-516 (Software Warranty service and support) (English) 1-800-426-7378

(English) 000-411-005-6649 (Spanish) 0-800-100-2011 (Spanish) For northern area and Hanoi: 84-4-8436675 For southern area and Ho Chi Minh City: 84-8-829-5160

(English, Vietnamese) Appendix B. Warranty information 75 Guarantee supplement for Mexico This supplement is considered part of Lenovos Statement of Limited Warranty and shall be effective solely and exclusively for products distributed and commercialized within Territory of the Mexican United States. In the event of a conflict, the terms of this supplement shall apply. All software programs pre-loaded in the equipment shall only have a thirty-

(30) day guarantee for installation defects from the date of purchase. Lenovo is not responsible for the information in such software programs and/or any additional software programs installed by you or installed after purchase of the product. Services not chargeable to the guarantee shall be charged to the final user, prior an authorization. In the event that warranty repair is required please call the Customer Support Center at 001-866-434-2080, where you will be directed to the nearest Authorized Service Center. Should no Authorized Service Center exist in your city, location or within 70 kilometers of your city or location, the guarantee includes any reasonable delivery charges related to the transportation of the product to our nearest Authorized Service Center. Please call the nearest Authorized Service Center to obtain the necessary approvals or information concerning the shipment of the product and the shipment address. To obtain a list of Authorized Service Centers, please visit:

http://www.pc.ibm.com/la/centros_de_servicio/servicio_mexico/

servicio_mexico.html Manufactured by:

SCI Systems de Mxico, S.A. de C.V. Av. De la Solidaridad Iberoamericana No. 7020 Col. Club de Golf Atlas El Salto, Jalisco, Mxico C.P. 45680, Tel. 01-800-3676900 Marketing by:

Lenovo de Mxico, Comercializacin y Servicios, S. A. de C. V. Alfonso Npoles Gndara No 3111 Parque Corporativo de Pea Blanca Delegacin lvaro Obregn Mxico, D.F., Mxico C.P. 01210, Tel. 01-800-00-325-00 76 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Appendix C. Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) For your ThinkPad computer, the following parts are designated Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) parts. Listed below are the CRUs and the documentation where removal/replacement instructions are located Service and Troubleshooting Guide Setup Poster Tier 1 CRUs Access Help Online Hardware Maintenance Manual Online Video Battery Hard disk drive Optical drive Ultrabay device Optional Memory AC adapter and power cord Phone line cord TrackPoint cap Memory

(standard) Keyboard Palm rest -

integrated with touch pad and Fingerprint reader Mini-PCI Card Communication Daughter Card X X X X X X Tier 2 CRUs X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 77 You can find instructions for replacing CRUs in Access Help, your on-board help. To start Access Help, press the ThinkVantage button on your ThinkPad and then click Access Help. If you are unable to access these instructions or if you have difficulty replacing a CRU, you can use either of the following additional resources:

v The Online Hardware Maintenance Manual and Online Videos available from the Support Web site www.lenovo.com/think/support v The Customer Support Center. For the telephone number of the Support Center for your country or region, see Worldwide telephone list on page 72. 78 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Appendix D. Notices Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the users responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 500 Park Offices Drive, Hwy. 54 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO GROUP LTD. PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 79 indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. Television output notice The following notice applies to models that have the factory-installed television-output feature. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Electronic emissions notices The following information refers to ThinkPad Z60t, machine type MT 2511, MT 2512, MT 2513, and MT 2514, and ThinkPad Z60m, machine type 2529, 2530, 2531, 2532, 2533, 2534, 2535, and 2536. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, used, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the 80 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

v Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. v v Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. v Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible party:

Lenovo (United States) Inc. One Manhattanville Road Purchase, New York 10577 Telephone: (919) 254-0532 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. European Union EMC Directive conformance statement This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Lenovo option cards. Appendix D. Notices 81 This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Environmental notices for Japan If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a ThinkPad computer that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. The computer is categorized as industrial waste. It should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, IBM Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers. For details, visit the IBM Japan Web site at www.ibm.com/jp/services/its/r/env/pcrecycle.html Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-used computers by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. For details, visit the IBM Japan Web site at www.ibm.com/jp/services/its/r/env/pcrecycle_p.html Disposing of a ThinkPad computer component containing heavy metal The printed circuit board of a ThinkPad computer contains heavy metal.

(Soldering with lead is used on the printed circuit board.) To properly dispose of the disused printed circuit board, follow the instructions in Collecting and recycling a disused ThinkPad computer. Disposing of a disused lithium battery A button-shaped lithium battery is installed on the system board of your ThinkPad computer to back up the main battery. If you want to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or ask for a repair service provided by IBM. If you have replaced it by yourself and want to dispose of the disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase, and follow the instructions. If you use a ThinkPad computer at home and need to dispose of a lithium battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. Handling a disused ThinkPad battery pack Your ThinkPad computer has a lithium ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. If you are a company ThinkPad computer user and 82 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide need to dispose of a battery pack, contact the proper person in ThinkPad sales, service, or marketing, and follow that persons instructions. For details, visit the IBM Japan Web site at www.ibm.com/jp/pc/environment/recycle/battery/

If you use a ThinkPad computer at home and need to dispose of a battery pack, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. IBM Lotus Software Offer About the offer: As a qualifying ThinkPad computer customer, you are receiving a single, limited license for the Lotus Notes standalone client and a single license for the Lotus SmartSuite software. These licenses entitle you to install and use this software on your new ThinkPad computer using one of the following options:

v Media for this software is not included in this offer. If you do not already have the appropriate Lotus Notes Client or Lotus SmartSuite software media, you can order a CD and install the software onto your computer. For more information, see To order a CD on page 84. v If you already have a licensed copy of the software, you are entitled to make and use one additional copy of the software you have. About IBM Lotus Notes: With your standalone, limited use Notes client, you can integrate your most valuable messaging, collaborative and personal information management (PIM) resources like e-mail, calendar, to-do list allowing you to access them while connected to or disconnected from your network. The standalone license does not include the right to access any IBM Lotus Domino servers; however this stand-alone license may be upgraded to a full Notes license at a reduced price. For more information visit http://www.lotus.com/notes. About IBM Lotus SmartSuite: Lotus SmartSuite contains powerful applications with timesaving features that give you a head start on your work and guide you through individual tasks. v Lotus Word Pro Word Processor v Lotus 1-2-3 Spreadsheet v Lotus Freelance Graphics Presentation Graphics v Lotus Approach Database v Lotus Organizer Time, Contact, and Information Manager v Lotus FastSite Web Publisher v Lotus SmartCenter Internet Information Manager Customer Support: For support information and phone numbers to help with initial installation of software, visit http://www.lenovo.com/think/support. To purchase technical support beyond this initial installation support, visit http://www.lotus.com/passport. Appendix D. Notices 83 International Program License Agreement:The software licensed to you under this offer does not include software upgrades or technical support, and is subject to the terms and conditions of the IBM International Program License Agreement (IPLA) that accompanies the software. Your use of the Lotus SmartSuite and Lotus Notes programs described in this offer constitutes acceptance of the terms of this Offer and the IPLA. For further information regarding the IBM IPLA, visit http://www.ibm.com/software/sla/sladb.nsf. These programs are not for resale. Proof of Entitlement: The proof of purchase for your qualifying ThinkPad computer, as well as this Offer document, should be retained as your proof of entitlement. Purchasing Upgrades, Additional Licenses and Technical Support Software upgrades and technical support are available for a fee through IBMs Passport Advantage Program. For information about purchasing additional licenses for Notes, SmartSuite, or other Lotus products, visit http://www.ibm.com or http://www.lotus.com/passport. To order a CD:

Important: Pursuant to this Offer, you may order one CD media per license. You will need to provide the 7 digit serial number of the new ThinkPad computer that you purchased. The CD is provided at no charge; however, applicable shipping, duties and taxes may be imposed by local jurisdictions. Please allow 10 to 20 business days from receipt of your request for delivery. In U. S. Or Canada:

Call 800-690-3899 In Latin American Countries:

Via the Internet: http://smartsuite.modusmedia.com Mail address:

IBM - Lotus Notes and SmartSuite Program Modus Media International 501 Innovation Avenue Morrisville, NC, USA 27560 Fax: 919-405-4495 To inquire about an order, contact:

smartsuite_ibm@modusmedia.com In European Countries:

Via the Internet: http://ibm.modusmedia.co.uk Mail address:

IBM - Lotus Notes and SmartSuite Program P.O. Box 3118 Cumbernauld, Scotland, G68 9JX To inquire about an order, contact:

ibm_smartsuite@modusmedia.com 84 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide In Asia Pacific Countries:

Via the Internet: http://smartsuite.modusmedia.com Mail address:

IBM - Lotus Notes and SmartSuite Program Modus Media International eFulfillment Solution Center 750 Chai Chee Road

#03-10/14, Technopark at Chai Chee, Singapore 469000 Fax: +65 6448 5830 To inquire about an order, contact:

Smartsuiteapac@modusmedia.com Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo PS/2 Rescue and Recovery ThinkLight ThinkPad TrackPoint Ultrabay UltraNav IBM (used under license) Lotus 1-2-3 Approach Lotus FastSite Freelance Graphics Lotus Notes Lotus Organizer Lotus SmartCenter SmartSuite Word Pro Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Intel, Pentium, and Intel SpeedStep are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. (For a complete list of Intel trademarks, see www.intel.com/sites/corporate/tradmarx.htm) Appendix D. Notices 85 Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 86 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide standby problems 23 startup problem 29 storage device upgrading 35 T telephone, help by 44 tips, important 8 TrackPoint problems 22 troubleshooting 14 U UltraNav problems 22 USB problem 32 W warranty information 51 Web, help by 44 Index B battery problems 27 replacing 40 BIOS Setup Utility 33 boot priority order list 31 built-in wireless networking card problem 32 C carrying the computer 8 CD playback problem 31 cleaning the computer 11 computer lock 30 computer screen 26 configuration setup 33 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) parts list 77 D diagnosing problems 14 DVD playback problem 31 E environment 8 error messages 14 errors without messages 19 F features 4, 5 fingerprint reader 4, 5 authentication problems 30 care 11 front view, z60m 3 front view, z60t 2 H hard disk problems 28 upgrading 35 help and service 44 around the world 46 by telephone 44 by Web 44 hibernation problems 23 I important tips 8 Internet connection problem 32 K keyboard problems 21 L locations, z60m 3 locations, z60t 2 P password problems 20 setting 9 PC-Doctor for Windows 14 power switch problems 21 problems battery 27 computer screen 26 diagnosing 14 fingerprint reader 30 hard disk 28 hibernation 23 keyboard 21 password 20 power management 23 power switch 21 standby 23 startup 29 TrackPoint 22 troubleshooting 14 UltraNav 22 R rear view, z60m 3 rear view, z60t 2 recovering preinstalled software 34 Regulatory Notice xvii replacing, battery 40 Rescue and Recovery 34 S safety instruction v setup BIOS 33 configuration 33 software problem 32 specifications 7 Lenovo 2005. Portions IBM Corp. 2005. 87 88 ThinkPad Z60t and Z60m Series Service and Troubleshooting Guide Part Number: 39T2191 Printed in China

(1P) P/N: 39T2191

 

 

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Copyright 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Windows and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Energy Star is a U.S. registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: January 2007 Document Part Number: 437312-002 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices .................................................................................... 3 Brazilian notice ..................................................................................................................................... 4 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 4 Canadian notices .................................................................................................................................. 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 5 European Union notices ....................................................................................................................... 5 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices ...................................................................... 6 France ................................................................................................................. 6 Italy ...................................................................................................................... 6 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices ......................................................................... 6 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Indian notice ......................................................................................................................................... 7 Japanese notices ................................................................................................................................. 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN certification markings .................................................................................... 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 9 Certification markings for Bluetooth devices ........................................................................ 9 Korean notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Singaporean wireless notice .............................................................................................................. 10 Taiwan notice ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Energy Star compliance ..................................................................................................................... 11 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 12 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 12 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 13 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 14 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 20 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 21 ENWW iii Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Voice support .................................................................................................... 21 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 22 Japanese power cord notice .............................................................................................. 22 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 22 2 Safety notices Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 23 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 23 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal .................................................................................................................................. 25 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 25 Chinese material content declarations ............................................................................................... 26 Japanese material content declaration ............................................................................................... 28 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 28 Perchlorate material - special handling may apply ............................................................................. 28 Index ................................................................................................................................................................. 29 iv ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, installed on the computer, open the Device Manager utility. In Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. In Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. ENWW 1 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Tablet PC Tour user guide included with the computer. During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm

(8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the Notebook Tour user guide included with the computer. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. ENWW Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the computer. Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennae for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. For radio devices in the 5250- to 5350-MHz and 5470- to 5725-MHz bands, the maximum gain as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limit is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.6 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.6 dBi 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi For radio devices in the 5725- to 5825-MHz band, the maximum gain permitted, as specified by the Canadian e.i.r.p. limits for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation, is noted below:

Broadcom 802.11a/b/g WLAN = 5.8 dBi Broadcom 4321AG 802.11a/b/g/draft-n Wi-Fi Adapter = 5.8 dBi Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG = 6 dBi Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN = 6 dBi Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. The following CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth. Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany ENWW Avis Canadien 5 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The following CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may not be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy E'necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l'uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice Germany Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Wireless LAN certification markings The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

ENWW Indian notice 7 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311BG 802.11b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 4311AG 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Broadcom 802.11b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

The Broadcom 802.11a/b/g Wireless LAN with Broadrange has the certification mark below:

Bluetooth devices Certification markings for Bluetooth devices The HP integrated module with Bluetooth has the certification mark below:

The HP integrated module with Bluetooth 2.0 has the certification mark below:

ENWW Japanese notices 9 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Korean notice Singaporean wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antenna during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Taiwan notice Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Laser compliance This product may be provided with a device containing a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with US FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Each laser product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated May 27, 2001; and with IEC 60825-1:1993/A2:2001. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. ENWW Energy Star compliance 11 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. ENWW Modem notices 13 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 15 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 17 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

18 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Modem notices 19 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems AC'97 modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the Agere Systems HDA modem is below:

The Japanese certification mark for the HDAUDIO Soft Data Fax Modem with SmartCP is below:

20 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. ENWW Modem notices 21 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 22 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

2 Safety notices Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery;

short the external contacts on a battery; or dispose of a battery in fire or water. Do not expose a battery to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in clause 7 of EN 50332-2. If a headset or earphones are shipped with this product, they are in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. ENWW Battery notices 23 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 2 Safety notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Battery disposal WARNING! When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where you purchased the product. ENWW Battery disposal 25 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Chinese material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

ENWW Chinese material content declarations 27 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Japanese material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2005, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Index Symbols/Numerics 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 A airline travel notice 10 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 10, 23 Brazilian notice 4 C Canadian modem statement 20 Canadian notices 4 Chinese Material Content Declarations 26 D Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 25 equipment 25 mercury 28 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 25 Energy Star compliance 11 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 25 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 5 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 ENWW France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 23 I Indian notice 7 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 6 J Japanese material content declaration 28 Japanese modem statement 20 Japanese notice 7 Japanese power cord notice 22 K Korean notice 10 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 22 mercury disposal notice 28 modem notices 12 modem statements Canadian 20 Japanese 20 New Zealand 21 U.S. 13 N New Zealand modem statement 21 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 23, 25 Brazilian 4 Canadian 4 environmental 25 equipment disposal 25 ergonomics 6 European Union 5 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 23 Indian 7 Japanese 7 Japanese power cord 22 Korean 10 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 22 mercury disposal 28 modem 12 perchlorate material 28 power cords 22, 23 Singaporean 10 Taiwan 10 travel 24 P power cord notice 22, 23 S Singaporean wireless notice 10 Index 29 Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

T Taiwan notice 10 travel notice 24 U U.S. modem statement 13 V voice support 21 W wireless LAN devices 3 30 Index ENWW Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

Antenna House XSL Formatter (Evaluation) http://www.antennahouse.com/

 

 

Lenovo(Japan), Ltd., Date: November 01, 2006 Document Number: UY610-03-0031-15 Users Manual The attachment is the part of the users manual of the specific host device (Lenovo ThinkPad X60 Tablet Series) that indicates the regulatory notice concerning the FCC Part 2/15/22/24 and IC RSS-

210/102. The regulatory notice consists of the following separate parts.

WLAN/ Bluetooth/ Modem features

WWAN feature (Model: MC5720, MC8755 or MC8765) (US only) And the following electronic manual referred in the notice is also attached.

Antenna location of each wireless features

Operation/Installation instruction of wireless features Regulatory notice concerning WLAN/ Bluetooth/ Modem features Part Number: 42T8358 ThinkPad X60 Tablet Regulatory Notice for the wireless LAN module, Bluetooth module and modem. Read first regulatory information Please read this document before you use the ThinkPad X60 Tablet computer. ThinkPad computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. Veuillez lire ce document avant dutiliser lordinateur ThinkPad. Lordinateur ThinkPad est conforme aux normes de scurit et de radiofrquence du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est agre. Vous devez installer et utiliser votre ordinateur en respectant scrupuleusement les instructions dcrites ci-aprs. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) If your ThinkPad computer contains a Wireless WAN Adapter, be sure to also read ThinkPad Regulatory Notice for Wireless WAN Adapter, included with your computer. I. RF safety compliance The antennas used for wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards (Model:

AR5BXB6, WM3945ABG, AR5BXB72) in this notebook computer are located on the upper side of the LCD screen, and the antenna used for Bluetooth card

(Model: J07H081) is located on the keyboard bezel under the palm rest to the right. For the illustrations of each antenna location, see the UltraConnect wireless LAN antennas and Bluetooth antenna sections in Access Help. Note: Main, Auxiliary and Third antennas are used for the WLAN cards. Third antenna is only used with the Model: AR5BXB72 and functions as Receive Only. It does not emit any radio frequency energy. For WLAN cards (Models: AR5BXB6 and WM3945ABG) using IEEE 802.11 a/b/g transmission mode, radio frequency energy is not emitted simultaneously from both Main and Auxiliary antennas. One of the antennas is selected automatically or manually (by users) to have good Copyright Lenovo 2006 1 quality of radiocommunication (transmission diversity function). For the WLAN card (Model: AR5BXB72) using either the MIMO (Multiple In Multiple Out) or IEEE 802.11 a/b/g transmission mode, multiple antennas (Main and Auxiliary) can transmit radio frequency energy simultaneously, in order to obtain high data transmission speed. The total radiated energy from those antennas (Main and Auxiliary) connected to one of the wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards and Bluetooth card (with its built-in antenna on the card) conforms to the FCC limit of SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement regarding CFR Part 2 section 1093. The maximum SAR values measured for the ThinkPad X60 Tablet computer are less than the limit (1.6W/Kg), when the computer was used in the conventional settings. II. User installable Wireless LAN module Mini PCI Express Cards:

v FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB6 (Model: AR5BXB6) v FCC ID: PD9LEN3945ABG (Model: WM3945ABG) v FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB72-L (Model: AR5BXB72) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). i) FCC ID of wireless module: There is no FCC ID for Mini PCI Express Card shown on the enclosure of your ThinkPad computer. Instead you will find an indicator pointing to the location of the FCC ID on the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer. For the location of the FCC ID indicator, see the Location of the FCC ID label section in Access Help. The FCC ID is affixed on the approved module installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the location of the slot, see the PCI Express Mini Card slots section in Access Help. If no integrated wireless LAN ii) Installation of approved wireless module:

Mini PCI Express Card has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one, provided by Lenovo as an option. Plug the wireless card option into the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the installation procedure, see the Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection section in Access Help. Attention: The ThinkPad computers contain an authentication mechanism If you install an unauthorized wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card that is not approved for use in your computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. iii) Radio Frequency interference requirements:

2 v The devices have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. The models AR5BXB6 and AR5BXB72 were subject to DoC. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 7. The model WM3945ABG underwent the certification process, thus FCC ID PD9LEN3945ABG for model WM3945ABG includes all compliances of Part 15 Subpart B, C, and E. v Each device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires these products to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. v High power radar are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. III. Pre-installed integrated Bluetooth module v FCC ID: MCLJ07H081 (Model: J07H081) The device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for both a Class B digital device regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart B and an intentional radiator regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart C; then it underwent the certification processes for both rules. Thus the FCC ID MCLJ07H081 of this device includes both certifications of Part 15 Subpart B and C. If you find the FCC ID i) FCC ID and installation of the module:

MCLJ07H081 on the label at the bottom side of your computer, your computer integrates the Bluetooth transmitter module (Model: J07H081). The Bluetooth module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. If your card requires replacement via the proper steps shown in Getting help and service of the Service and Troubleshooting Guide, shipped with your computer, Lenovo will request you to send your computer with the card to Lenovo so that Lenovo will repair it. ii) The FCC RF safety requirement: For the location of the Bluetooth module J07H081 and its built-in antenna, see the Bluetooth antenna section in Access Help. The radiated output power of the Bluetooth module is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Therefore, a 20 cm of separation between the Bluetooth antenna and human body is not required. IV. Digitizer function in LCD screen The ThinkPad X60 Tablet computers employ a digitizer function in LCD screen which is able to sense the Tablet Digitizer Pen shipped associated with your computer. The digitizer emits extra low power radio frequency and 3 complies with the FCC Part 15, Subpart C. The FCC ID: PU5-X60T is indicated on the label at the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer. V. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your ThinkPad computer is approved for simultaneous use of the transmitters listed below:

v Wireless LAN adapter (FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB6, PD9LEN3945ABG or v Bluetooth module (FCC ID: MCLJ07H081) PPD-AR5BXB72-L) Please make sure of the following conditions on use of these wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, you are requested to confirm that the device conforms to the SAR requirement and is approved to use for ThinkPad X60 Tablet Series computer. 2. All other wireless features including the above integrated devices in your ThinkPad computer are required to be turned off. 3. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option devices users manual. Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I) User installable Wireless LAN modules:

v v v IC: 4105A-AR5BXB6 (Model: AR5BXB6) IC: 1000M-LEN3945 (Model: WM3945ABG) IC: 4104A-ARBXB72L (Model: AR5BXB72) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). The certification number of Industry Canada for the approved Mini PCI Express wireless card is affixed on the module installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the location of the slot, see the PCI Express Mini Card slots section in Access Help, your online manual. Attention: The ThinkPad computer contains an authentication mechanism You can install or remove each wireless feature by yourself. If you install an unauthorized wireless adapter that is not approved for use in the ThinkPad computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. II) Digitizer function in LCD screen: The ThinkPad X60 Tablet computers employ a digitizer function in LCD screen which is able to sense the Tablet Digitizer Pen shipped associated with your computer. The digitizer emits extra low power radio frequency and complies with the standard (RSS-210). 4 The IC certification number IC: 4182A-X60T is indicated on the label at the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer. III) Pre-installed integrated Bluetooth module:

v IC: 2878D-J07H081 (Model: J07H081) If you find an indication Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC:

2878D-J07H081 on the label at the bottom side of your computer, your computer integrates the Bluetooth transmitter module. The Bluetooth module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. If your card requires replacement via the proper steps shown in Getting help and service of the Service and Troubleshooting Guide, Lenovo will request you to send your computer with the card to Lenovo so that Lenovo will repair it. Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210):

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The transmitter devices have been designed to operate with the antennas integrated in ThinkPad computer, and having a maximum gain of within 3 dBi. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz and 5725-5785 MHz bands complies with the e.i.r.p. limit in section A9.2 of RSS-210. When you use the model AR5BXB6, AR5BXB72 or WM3945ABG:

v The devices for the band 51505250 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. v High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102): ThinkPad computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb Numro dhomologation IC I) Module sans fil installable par lutilisateur: Les cartes Express mini-PCI de rseau local sans fil:

5 v v v IC: 4105A-AR5BXB6 (Modle: AR5BXB6) IC: 1000M-LEN3945 (Modle: WM3945ABG) IC: 4104A-ARBXB72L (Modle: AR5BXB72) Les cartes de rseau local sans fil Express mini-PCI commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. Le numro dhomologation dIndustrie Canada pour le carte sans fil Express mini-PCI homologue est indiqu sur le module install dans lemplacement rserv la carte Express mini-PCI. Pour plus d'informations sur lemplacement rserv la carte Express mini-PCI reportez-vous la rubrique

"ThinkPad - Prsentation" dans Access Help. Attention: Lordinateur ThinkPad contient un mcanisme dauthentification. Vous pouvez installer ou dsinstaller tout dispositif sans fil. Si vous installez une carte sans fil qui nest pas homologue pour lordinateur ThinkPad, lordinateur ne dmarrera pas; un message derreur sera affich et des bips sonores seront mis. II) Fonction de numrisation sur cran LCD: Les ordinateurs ThinkPad X60 Tablet utilisent une fonction de numrisation sur cran LCD capable de dtecter le stylo numriseur de la tablette graphique qui est associ votre ordinateur. Le numriseur met une frquence radio extrmement basse et il est conforme la norme CNR-210. Le numro de certification IC: 4182A-X60T figure sur ltiquette appose au bas de votre ordinateur ThinkPad. III) Module Bluetooth intgr prinstall:

v IC : 2878D-J07H081 (Modle : J07H081) Si la mention Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: 2878D-J07H081 figure sur ltiquette situe au bas de votre ordinateur, cela signifie que ce dernier intgre le module de transmission Bluetooth. Le module Bluetooth est prinstall par Lenovo et ne peut pas tre retir par les utilisateurs. Si votre carte doit tre remplace conformment aux tapes du Chapitre relatif laide et la maintenance dans le manuel Guide de maintenance et didentification des incidents, Lenovo vous demandera de lui envoyer votre ordinateur accompagn de la carte pour rparation. Remarque relative aux appareils de communication radio de faible puissance sans licence (CNR-210): Le fonctionnement de ce type dappareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio, et 2. cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. 6 Lorsque vous utilisez le modle AR5BXB6, AR5BXB72 ou WM3945ABG:

v Tout appareil destin la bande 5150-5250 MHz devra tre exclusivement utilis en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. v Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (cest--dire quils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LELAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. Exposition des tres humains aux champs radiolectriques (RF) (CNR-102):

Lordinateur ThinkPad utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui nmettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par le Ministre de la sant canadien pour la population. Consultez le Safety Code 6 sur le site Web du Ministre de la sant canadien ladresse www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement v Model: AR5BXB6 v Model: AR5BXB72 v Model: ThinkPad X60 Tablet (Machine Type: 6363, 6364, 6365, 6366, 6367 and 6368) Note: The compliances of the FCC Part 15 Subpart B for models WM3945ABG and J07H081 were proceeded by certification under each respective FCC ID: PD9WM3945ABG and MCLJ07H081. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

v Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. v v Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. v Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. 7 Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Inc. One Manhattanville Road Purchase, New York 10577 Telephone: (919) 254-0532 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Telecommunication notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Telephone Company Requirements (Part 68 of the FCC Rules) 1. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent, and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. In order to program this information into your computer, you should be sure to follow the installation instructions for your fax software package. 2. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. 8 3. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). If the built-in modem causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance. But, if advance notice isnt practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. 4. 5. Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the proper operation of your equipment. If they do, you will be given advance notice so as to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service. 6. No customer repairs are possible to the modem. If you experience trouble with this built-in modem, contact your Lenovo Authorized Seller, or the Customer Support Center. For the most current phone numbers, go to http://www.lenovo.com/think/support and click Support phone list. The telephone company may ask you to disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected, or until you are sure the equipment is not malfunctioning. 7. The modem may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission or corporation commission for information. 8. When ordering network interface (NI) service from the Local Exchange Carrier, specify service arrangement USOC RJ11C. 9. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this Data/Fax Modem does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. 10. Industry Canada requirements Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment 9 Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of communication. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs of alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for the terminal equipment RD02-D110 is 0.1. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five. Avis Le prsent matriel est conforme aux spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada applicables au matriel terminal. Cette conformit est confirme par le numro denregistrement. Le sigle IC, plac devant le numro denregistrement, signifie que lenregistrement sest effectu conformment une dclaration de conformit et indique que les spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada ont t respectes. Il nimplique pas quIndustrie Canada a approuv le matriel. 10 Avant dinstaller ce matriel, lutilisateur doit sassurer quil est permis de le raccorder aux installations de lentreprise locale de tlcommunication. Le matriel doit galement tre install en suivant une mthode accepte de raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intrieurs de lentreprise utiliss pour un service individuel ligne unique peuvent tre prolongs au moyen dun dispositif homologu de raccordement (cordon prolongateur tlphonique interne). Labonn ne doit pas oublier quil est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonces ci-dessus nempechent pas la dgradation du service dans certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de tlcommunication ne permettent pas que lon raccorde leur matriel des jacks dabonn, sauf dans les cas prcis prvus par les tarifs paticuliers de ces entreprises. Les rparations de matriel homologu doivent tre effectues par un centre dentretien canadien autoris dsign par le fournisseur. La compagnie de tlcommunications peut demander lutilisateur de dbrancher un appareil la suite de rparations ou de modifications effectues par lutilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour sa propre protection, lutilisateur doit sassurer que tous les fils de mise la terre de la source dnergie lectrique, des lignes tlphoniques et des canalisations deau mtalliques, sil y en a, sont raccords ensemble. Cette prcaution est particulirement importante dans les rgions rurales. Avertissement Lutilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-mme; il doit avoir recours un service dinspection des installations lectriques, ou lectricien, selon le cas. Lindice dquivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du prsent matriel RD02-D110 est de 0.1. LIES assign chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccords une interface tlphonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme dindices dquivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcde pas 5. Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo ThinkPad Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 11 Regulatory notice concerning WWAN features Part Number: 42T8138 ThinkPad Supplementary Regulatory Notice Read first regulatory information This notice is a supplementary document of the ThinkPad Service and Troubleshooting Guide. Please read this document before you use the ThinkPad computer. ThinkPad computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) If your computer integrates the Wireless WAN Adapter Model: MC5720, you may connect it to the radiocommunication Public Network in the USA. I. FCC ID of the wireless module The Wireless WAN Adapter (Model: MC5720) was certified under the FCC ID:

N7N-MC5720, but there is no FCC ID for the card shown on the enclosure of your ThinkPad computer. Instead you will find an indicator pointing to the location of the FCC ID on the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer. The FCC ID is affixed on the approved module installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the location of the slot, see the About your computer section in Access Help. II. Installation of the approved wireless module If no integrated wireless WAN Mini PCI Express Card has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one, provided by Lenovo as an option. Plug the wireless card option into the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the location of the slot, see the About your computer section in Access Help. Attention: The ThinkPad computers contain an authentication mechanism. If you install an unauthorized wireless WAN Mini PCI Express Card that is not approved for use in the ThinkPad computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. III. RF safety compliance The total radiated energy from all the antennas connected to the Wireless WAN adapter (Model: MC5720), the Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express adapter Copyright Lenovo 2006 1

(Model: WM3945ABG, AR5BXB6, or AR5BXB72), and the Bluetooth module

(Model: J07H081) conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093. For the location of the transmission antenna used for the Wireless WAN adapter in this notebook computer, see the About your computer section in Access Help. IV. Emergency Calls The Wireless WAN adapters embedded in the ThinkPad do not support voice calls, hence their use for essential communication is not possible, including emergency calls regarding the E911 rule. V. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters If your ThinkPad computer contains the Model: WM3945ABG (FCC ID:

PD9LEN3945ABG), AR5BXB6 (FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB6), AR5BXB72 (FCC ID:

PPD-AR5BXB72-L), or the Bluetooth module (FCC ID: MCLJ07H081), the Wireless WAN module Model: MC5720 is approved for simultaneous use with these radio devices. Please make sure of the following conditions on use of these wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all other wireless features including the above integrated devices in your ThinkPad computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option devices users manual. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement v Model: AR5BXB6 v Model: AR5BXB72 v Model: MC5720 Note: The compliances of the FCC Part 15 Subpart B for models WM3945ABG and J07H081 were proceeded by certification under each respective FCC ID: PD9WM3945ABG and MCLJ07H081. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or 2 television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

v Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. v v Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to v Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Inc. One Manhattanville Road Purchase, New York 10577 Telephone: (919) 254-0532 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo ThinkPad Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 3 Part Number: 42T8139 ThinkPad Regulatory Notice Read first regulatory information This notice is a supplementary document of the ThinkPad Service and Troubleshooting Guide. Please read this document before you use the ThinkPad computer. ThinkPad computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) i) FCC ID of the wireless module The Wireless WAN Adapter (Model: MC8755) was certified under the FCC ID:

N7NMC8755, but there is no FCC ID for the card shown on the enclosure of your ThinkPad computer. Instead you will find an indicator pointing to the location of the FCC ID on the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer. The FCC ID is affixed on the approved module installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot. ii) Installation of the approved wireless module If no integrated wireless WAN Mini PCI Express Card has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one, provided by Lenovo as an option. Plug the wireless card option into the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the location of the slot, see the About your computer section in Access Help, your online manual. Attention: The ThinkPad computers contain an authentication mechanism If you install an unauthorized wireless WAN Mini PCI Express Card that is not approved for use in your computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. iii) RF safety compliance The total radiated energy from all the antennas connected to the Wireless WAN adapter (Model: MC8755), the Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express adapter

(Model: AR5BXB6 or AR5BXB72), and the Bluetooth module (Model: J07H081) conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093. Copyright Lenovo 2006 1 For the location of the antenna, see the About your computer section in Access Help, your online manual. iv) Emergency Calls The Wireless WAN adapters embedded in the ThinkPad computer do not support voice calls, hence their use for essential communication is not possible, including emergency calls regarding the E911 rule. v) Simultaneous use of RF transmitters If your ThinkPad computer contains the Model: WM3945ABG (Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection), you are required to disable it when you are traveling in the USA, because this WLAN radio carries EU specification and is not authorized by the FCC for use in the USA. If your ThinkPad computer contains the Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express adapter (Model: AR5BXB6 (FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB6) or AR5BXB72 ((FCC ID:

PPD-AR5BXB72-L)) or the Bluetooth module (FCC ID: MCLJ07H081), the Wireless WAN module Model: N7NMC8755 is approved for simultaneous use with these two radio devices. Please make sure of the following conditions on use of these wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all other wireless features including the above integrated devices in your ThinkPad computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option devices users manual. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement v Model: AR5BXB6 v Model: AR5BXB72 v Model: MC8755 Note: The compliances of the FCC Part 15 Subpart B for Bluetooth device

(Model: J07H081) were proceeded by certification under the FCC ID:

MCLJ07H081, thus the FCC ID: MCLJ07H081 includes both compliances for Part 15 Subpart B and C/E. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular 2 installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

v Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. v v Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. v Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Inc. One Manhattanville Road Purchase, New York 10577 Telephone: (919) 254-0532 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo ThinkPad Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 3 Part Number: 42T8140 ThinkPad Regulatory Notice Read first regulatory information This notice is a supplementary document of the ThinkPad Service and Troubleshooting Guide. Please read this document before you use the ThinkPad computer. ThinkPad computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) If your computer integrates the Wireless WAN Adapter Model MC8765, you may connect it to the radiocommunication Public Network in the USA. This WWAN Module is only certified with the FCC. i) FCC ID of the wireless module The Wireless WAN Adapter (Model: MC8765) was certified under the FCC ID:

N7NMC8765, but there is no FCC ID for the card shown on the enclosure of your ThinkPad computer. Instead you will find an indicator pointing to the location of the FCC ID on the bottom side of your ThinkPad computer. The FCC ID is affixed on the approved module installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the location of the slot, see the About your computer section in Access Help, your online manual. ii) Installation of the approved wireless module If no integrated wireless WAN Mini PCI Express Card has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one, provided by Lenovo as an option. Plug the wireless card option into the Mini PCI Express Card slot. For the location of the slot, see the About your computer section in Access Help, your online manual. Attention: The ThinkPad computers contain an authentication mechanism If you install an unauthorized wireless WAN Mini PCI Express Card that is not approved for use in your computer, the computer will not start, but only displays an error message and emits beeps. Copyright Lenovo 2006 1 iii) RF safety compliance The total radiated energy from all the antennas connected to the Wireless WAN adapter (Model: MC8765), the Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express adapter

(Model: AR5BXB6, WM3945ABG, or AR5BXB72), and the Bluetooth module

(Model: J07H081) conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093. For the location of the antenna, see the About your computer section in Access Help, your online manual. iv) Emergency Calls The Wireless WAN adapters embedded in the ThinkPad computer do not support voice calls, hence their use for essential communication is not possible, including emergency calls regarding the E911 rule. v) Simultaneous use of RF transmitters If your ThinkPad computer contains the Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express adapter (Model: AR5BXB6 (FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB6), WM3945ABG (FCC ID:

PD9LEN3945ABG) or AR5BXB72 (FCC ID: PPD-AR5BXB72-L)) or the Bluetooth module (FCC ID: MCLJ07H081), the Wireless WAN module Model:

N7NMC8765 is approved for simultaneous use with these two radio devices. Please make sure of the following conditions on use of these wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all other wireless features including the above integrated devices in your ThinkPad computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option devices users manual. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement v Model: AR5BXB6 v Model: AR5BXB72 v Model: MC8765 Note: The compliances of the FCC Part 15 Subpart B for Bluetooth device

(Model: J07H081) and WLAN device (Model: WM3945ABG) were proceeded by certification, thus the FCC ID: MCLJ07H081 and PD9WM3945ABG include both compliances for Part 15 Subpart B and C/E. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio 2 frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

v Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. v v Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. which the receiver is connected. v Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Inc. One Manhattanville Road Purchase, New York 10577 Telephone: (919) 254-0532 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo ThinkPad Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 3 Extracts from electronic manual indicated on the LCD screen WLAN antenna location Extracts from electronic manual indicated on the LCD screen Bluetooth antenna location Extracts from electronic manual indicated on the LCD screen WWAN antenna location Location of the FCC ID label 1/1 Location of the FCC ID label There is no FCC ID for the PCI Express Mini Card (wireless module) shown on the enclosure of your ThinkPad computer. Instead you will find an indicator pointing to the location of the FCC ID for the installed transmitter card on the bottom side of your ThinkPad as shown below. The FCC ID label is affixed on the card installed in the Mini PCI Express Card slot of your ThinkPad computer. If no integrated wireless PCI Express Mini Card has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one. To do this, follow the procedure in Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection or Replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection. file://C:\WORK\Dali1_Tama\0905\masteraibl\fccidlbl.htm 2006/09/11 Power-status indicators 1/2 Power-status indicators The computer has status indicators that show the mode (standby, hibernation, or normal), AC power status, and the status of the battery. The following shows the location and the meaning of the indicators:

1. Standby status operation. 2. AC power status 3. Battery status

Green: The computer is in standby mode.

Blinking green: The computer is entering standby or hibernation mode, or is resuming normal

Green: The ac adapter is connected and the computer is operating on ac power. If a battery is installed in the computer, it is charged when this indicator is green.

Off: The computer is operating on battery power.

Green: The battery has more than 20% charge.

Orange: The battery has between 5% and 20% charge.

Fast blinking orange: The battery has less than 5% charge. Note: The battery may be charging.

Slow blinking orange: The battery is being charged. When it reaches 20%, the blinking color changes to green.

Slow blinking green: The battery has between 20% and 80% charge, and charging is continuing. When the battery reaches 80% charge, blinking stops, but the charging may continue until the battery is 100% charged. Note: If the computer is operating on battery power, the Battery status indicator does not work while the computer is turned off or it is in standby mode or hibernation mode. If your computer is shipped with a wireless feature and a Bluetooth feature, you can use the following indicators:

4. Wireless WAN status

Green: The wireless WAN feature is on, and the radio link is ready for use.

Blinking green: Data is being transmitted. 5. Bluetooth status 6. Wireless LAN status

Green: The Bluetooth feature is on, and the radio link is ready for use.

Blinking green: Data is being transmitted.

Green: The wireless feature (the IEEE 802.11 standard) is on, and the radio link is ready for use.

Blinking green: Data is being transmitted. mk:@MSITStore:C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\KNAKA\My%20Documents\DA... 2006/10/05 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection 1/6 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection Before you start, print these instructions. Installation of the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN If no integrated wireless LAN Mini-PCI express card module has been preinstalled in your ThinkPad computer, you can install one. To do this, follow the procedure in the Replacement of the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN section below. Replacement of the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN If your computer has a PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN, you can replace it with a new one. To do this, follow the procedure below. To find the position of the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection in your computer, click here. Danger: During electrical storms, do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. Danger: Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid shock hazard, disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot. Attention: Before you start installing a module, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the PCI Express Mini Card. Note: Use the PCI Express Mini Card provided by Lenovo. Note: If your computer is a wireless upgradeable model, you can install a wireless PCI Express Mini Card, available as an option. To replace the PCI Express Mini Card with two connectors, click here. To replace the PCI Express Mini Card with three connectors, click here. To replace the PCI Express Mini Card with two connectors, do as follows:

1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures. 2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the Tablet Digitizer Pen. 5. Remove the keyboard. 6. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 7. Remove the screws that secure the upper case. 8. Open the display to about 90 degrees; then rotate the display clockwise 45 degrees as shown in the file://C:\WORK\Dali1_Tama\UPGRADE\replpci.htm 2006/09/11 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection 2/6 drawing. 9. Push the upper edge of the palm rest downward slightly (1), while lifting up the lower edge of the palm rest and pulling the upper case towards you (2) to remove it from the lower case. 10. If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card, use it to disconnect the cables from the card. If no such tool is included, disconnect the cables from the card by picking up the connectors with your fingers and gently unplugging them. 11. Press on the release latch (1) to release the card (2). Then remove the card. 12. Align the contact edge of the PCI Express Mini Card with the corresponding socket contact of the computer. 13. Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of the connectors; then press the latch to hold it in place. Make sure that the card is firmly fixed in the slot and does not move easily. file://C:\WORK\Dali1_Tama\UPGRADE\replpci.htm 2006/09/11 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection 3/6 14. Connect the cables to the new PCI Express Mini Card. Note: If the new PCI Express Mini Card has three connectors, as in the next drawing, you must attach the cables to the right and left connectors. If you attach either cable to the center connector, the connection speed will be lower. 15. Replace the upper case and push down on the front and sides of the upper case. 16. Rotate the display counterclockwise 45 degrees and close it. Turn the machine over and tighten the screws you have removed in step 7. 17. Store the Tablet Digitizer Pen back in its slot. 18. Reinstall the keyboard. 19. Reinstall the battery. 20. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on. If your computer has a Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) feature, the PCI Express Mini Card with three connectors comes with the computer. To replace the card for the MIMO feature, do as follows:

1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures. 2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the Tablet Digitizer Pen. 5. Remove the keyboard. 6. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 7. Remove the screws that secure the upper case. file://C:\WORK\Dali1_Tama\UPGRADE\replpci.htm 2006/09/11 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection 4/6 8. Open the display to about 90 degrees; then rotate the display clockwise 45 degrees as shown in the drawing. 9. Push the upper edge of the palm rest downward slightly (1), while lifting up the lower edge of the palm rest and pulling the upper case towards you (2) to remove it from the lower case. 10. If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card, use it to disconnect the cables from the card. If no such tool is included, disconnect the cables from the card by picking up the connectors with your fingers and gently unplugging them. 11. Press on the release latch (1) to release the card (2). Then remove the card. file://C:\WORK\Dali1_Tama\UPGRADE\replpci.htm 2006/09/11 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection 5/6 12. If the new PCI Express Mini Card has three connectors, skip this step. If the new PCI Express Mini Card has two connectors, first insert the connector end of the white cable in the plastic cable bag and affix the cable to the mainboard with tape. 13. Align the contact edge of the new card with the corresponding socket contact of the computer. 14. Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of the connectors; then press the latch to hold it in place. Make sure that the card is firmly fixed in the slot and does not move easily. 15. Connect the cables to the new card. Note: If the new PCI Express Mini Card has two connectors, as in the next drawing, you must attach the gray cable to the left connector and the black cable to the right connector. 16. Replace the upper case and push down on the front and sides of the upper case. file://C:\WORK\Dali1_Tama\UPGRADE\replpci.htm 2006/09/11 Installing and replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless LAN connection 6/6 17. Rotate the display counterclockwise 45 degrees and close it. Turn the machine over and tighten the screws you have removed in step 7. 18. Store the Tablet Digitizer Pen back in its slot. 19. Reinstall the keyboard. 20. Reinstall the battery. 21. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on. file://C:\WORK\Dali1_Tama\UPGRADE\replpci.htm 2006/09/11 Replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection 1/3 Replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection Before you start, print these instructions. Some ThinkPad(R) models have a PCI Express Mini Card slot for wireless WAN connection. To replace the PCI Express Mini Card with a new one, follow the procedure below. To find the position of the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection in your computer, click here . Danger: During electrical storms, do not connect the cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. Danger: Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid shock hazard, disconnect the cables before opening the cover of this slot. Attention: Before you start installing a PCI Express Mini Card, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the card. To replace the PCI Express Mini Card, do as follows:

1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait for a few minutes, till the inside of the computer cools, before you start the following procedures. 2. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3. Remove the battery. 4. Remove the Tablet Digitizer Pen. 5. Remove the keyboard. 6. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 7. Remove the screws that secure the upper case. 8. Open the display to about 90 degrees; then rotate the display clockwise 45 degrees as shown in the drawing. mk:@MSITStore:C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\KNAKA\My%20Documents\DA... 2006/10/02 Replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection 2/3 9. Push the upper edge of the palm rest downward slightly (1), while lifting up the lower edge of the palm rest and pulling the upper case towards you (2) to remove it from the lower case. Note: Pull up slightly to release the edges on the right side of the palm rest. 10. If a tool for removing connectors is included in the package with the new card, use it to disconnect the cables from the card (1). If no such tool is included, disconnect the cables from the card (1) by picking up the connectors with your fingers and gently unplugging them. Then peel off the antenna (2). Note: Depending on the system configuration of your computer, the card may have only one connector. 11. Remove the screws (3). The card pops up (4). Remove the card (3). mk:@MSITStore:C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\KNAKA\My%20Documents\DA... 2006/10/02 Replacing the PCI Express Mini Card for wireless WAN connection 3/3 12. Align the contact edge of the new Wireless WAN Card with the corresponding socket contact of the computer. 13. Pivot the card until you can snap it into place by pressing the upper side of the connectors; then secure the card with the two screws. Reattach the antenna, and connect the cables to the new card. Note: Depending on the system configuration of your computer, the card may have only one connector. 14. Replace the upper case and push down on the front and sides of the upper case. 15. Rotate the display counterclockwise 45 degrees and close it. Turn the machine over and tighten the screws you have removed in step 7. 16. Store the Tablet Digitizer Pen back in its slot. 17. Reinstall the keyboard. 18. Reinstall the battery. 19. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac adapter and cables to the computer; then turn it on. mk:@MSITStore:C:\Documents%20and%20Settings\KNAKA\My%20Documents\DA... 2006/10/02 Wireless connections 1/1 Wireless connections You can connect to the Internet without connecting a wire to your computer by setting up a wireless access point or residential gateway. A wireless access point does not connect you to the Internet directly. Instead, it connects to a wired connection such as a cable modem, a DSL modem, or a phone line. Certain types of wireless connections, such as wireless LAN (the IEEE 802.11 standard), are being used to connect to an access point. To connect to an access point, you will need several pieces of information. You will need to know the network name (obtain this from your administrator), and your MAC address (which should have come with your computer or wireless networking card). You may also need to set up encryption. Contact your administrator for your network name and encryption settings. You may need to register your MAC address with your network administrator before connecting to your company network. A residential gateway is the consumer version of an access point. Consult your residential gateway instructions for setup. Be careful to disable the wireless function when you are not using it because it uses power even when you are not connected to the network. Some models have an integrated Wireless LAN antenna and hardware. If your computer did not come with integrated wireless, you can purchase a PC Card as an option. Wireless LAN gives you a high-speed connection to an access point. If your computer comes with the built-in wireless LAN card, refer to Making wireless LAN connections for more information. If your computer has the Integrated Bluetooth features and/or comes with the built-in wireless WAN card, refer to Using Bluetooth and Using wireless WAN connections for more information. file://C:\TamaTemp\Wireless.htm\Wireless.htm 2006/09/07 Making wireless LAN connections 1/1 Making wireless LAN connections You can stay connected to your network while you are in the office, in a meeting room, or at home, with no need for a wired connection. Some ThinkPad(R) models come with a built-in wireless networking card and a configuration utility to help you make wireless connections and monitor the status of your connection. Attention: If you carry your ThinkPad computer with the wireless LAN feature into an airplane, you need to disable it before boarding. To disable it, refer to the instructions in Enabling or disabling the wireless feature. Wireless networking setup Wireless security features Checking wireless connection status Enabling or disabling the wireless feature Wireless upgradeable ThinkPad models Note: Some models come with a wireless networking card and a wireless LAN configuration utility built-

in. If your computer does not come with these features, you can purchase the wireless networking card as an option. For more information, refer to Finding ThinkPad options. Note: If you use the wireless LAN feature, place your computer so that there are as few obstacles as possible between the wireless LAN access point and the computer. Also for the best connection of the wireless LAN feature, open your computer display to an angle of slightly more than 90 degrees. Note: If you use the computer in tablet mode, do not cover the UltraConnect(TM) wireless antennas built into the display. file://C:\TamaTemp\Wireconn.htm\Wireconn.htm 2006/09/07 Wireless networking setup 1/1 Wireless networking setup To use the built-in wireless networking card (the IEEE 802.11 standard) to communicate, click this button to start Access Connections, and follow the instructions on the screen. Note: Before you start setting up wireless networking connections by using Access Connections, obtain a Network Name (SSID) and your encryption information from your network administrator. Access Connections, a connectivity assistant program, can easily enable one network adapter and disable the other adapters on demand. After setting up your wireless networking connection, you can use the program to quickly switch the network settings. file://C:\TamaTemp\wireset.htm\wireset.htm 2006/09/07 Wireless security features 1/1 Wireless security features Advances in wireless technology require that we manage your security more reliably than ever. Therefore, Lenovo has extended its Embedded Security Subsystem to encompass virtually all of our ThinkPad(R) and desktop computer lines. This security subsystem helps protect data, hardware, network access and communications - both wired and wireless - on select ThinkPad and desktop PCs. The Embedded Security Subsystem provides hardware-based protection of critical security information, including passwords, encryption keys, and electronic credentials. It also helps identify computer users involved in transactions, and helps establish that data transmissions are authentic, confidential and intact. Security and Privacy Services for wireless risk assessment and wireless solution design can help you assess the risks based on your business needs, identify your information risk position, and integrate security strategies, policies, and architectures to help you achieve your wireless e-business objectives. To effectively manage risk on an ongoing basis, organizations must have a sound security strategy. By understanding threats and vulnerabilities at an early stage, we can help define the necessary scope and features of your wireless e-business security infrastructure. For more information on wireless security offerings, click the following link:

http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/think/thinkvantagetech/security.html file://C:\TamaTemp\wiresec.HTM\wiresec.HTM 2006/09/07 Checking wireless connection status 1/1 Checking wireless connection status You can check the signal strength and status of your wireless connection either by opening Access Connections, or by double-clicking the Access Connections wireless status icon in the system tray. The Access Connections wireless status icon displays the signal strength and status of your wireless connection as follows:

No link or a very poor one Usable but weak link Strong link Wireless radio is disabled Note: If you have trouble in making a connection, try moving your computer closer to your wireless access point. file://C:\TamaTemp\wirestat.htm\wirestat.htm 2006/09/07 Enabling or disabling the wireless feature 1/1 Enabling or disabling the wireless feature To enable or disable the wireless feature, press Fn+F5. A list of wireless features appears in the Wireless Radio Control window. You can turn the feature on and off with a single click. You can also enable or disable the feature by the following procedures. To enable the wireless feature, do as follows:

1. Click the Wireless Icon in the system tray. 2. Click Power On Wireless Radio. To disable the wireless feature, do as follows:

1. Click the Wireless Icon in the system tray. 2. Click Power Off Wireless Radio. Note: To enable the wireless radio, do as follows:

1. Select Enabled for the Internal Wireless Device in the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. Select the On position of the wireless radio switch on the computer. 3. Click the Wireless Icon in the system tray and select Power On Wireless Radio. Or press Fn+F5 to open the Wireless Radio Control window, and then turn the feature on. Note: You can use the wireless radio switch to disable the wireless radio of all the wireless devices on your computer. Note: You can also use the Tablet Shortcut Menu to enable or disable the wireless feature if you are using your computer in tablet mode. file://C:\TamaTemp\Wlenab.htm\Wlenab.htm 2006/09/07 Enabling or disabling the wireless feature 1/1 Enabling or disabling the wireless feature To enable or disable the wireless feature, press Fn+F5. A list of wireless features appears in the Wireless Radio Control window. You can turn the feature on and off with a single click. You can also enable or disable the feature by the following procedures. To enable the wireless feature, do as follows:

1. Click the Wireless Icon in the system tray. 2. Click Power On Wireless Radio. To disable the wireless feature, do as follows:

1. Click the Wireless Icon in the system tray. 2. Click Power Off Wireless Radio. Note: To enable the wireless radio, do as follows:

1. Select Enabled for the Internal Wireless Device in the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. Select the On position of the wireless radio switch on the computer. 3. Click the Wireless Icon in the system tray and select Power On Wireless Radio. Or press Fn+F5 to open the Wireless Radio Control window, and then turn the feature on. Note: You can use the wireless radio switch to disable the wireless radio of all the wireless devices on your computer. Note: You can also use the Tablet Shortcut Menu to enable or disable the wireless feature if you are using your computer in tablet mode. file://C:\TamaTemp\Wlenab.htm\Wlenab.htm 2006/09/07 Wireless upgradeable ThinkPad models 1/1 8 Wireless upgradeable ThinkPad models Depending on the model, your ThinkPad(R) computer might be wireless upgradeable. This means that your computer has an antenna that can support wireless LAN access when wireless LAN access points are available. Wireless devices are available from Lenovo: Finding ThinkPad options. file://C:\TamaTemp\wireread.htm\wireread.htm 2006/09/07 Using the tablet mode 1/2 Using the tablet mode In the tablet mode, you can use your ThinkPad(R) computer in a creative and intuitive way by jotting down notes and illustrations with the Tablet Digitizer Pen and then storing them digitally. To use your ThinkPad(R) computer in the tablet mode, do as follows:

1. Unlock the display latch (1) and open the computer display (2) slowly, holding the upper left and right sides of the display with both hands. Your computer is now in the notebook mode. 2. Open the display by at least 45 degrees, preferably by 90 degrees. Grasp the center of one side of the computer display with one hand while holding the keyboard bezel with the other hand; then rotate the display slowly clockwise until the back of the display is facing the keyboard. Your computer is now in the picture frame mode. Note: While rotating the display, do not press the upper edge of either side of the display. Note: In the notebook mode, you can rotate the computer display only clockwise. In the tablet mode, you can rotate it only counterclockwise. Do not force it to rotate in the wrong direction. 3. Close the computer display slowly, holding the upper left and right sides with both hands. Note: Make sure that the display is rotated at 180 degrees, so that the back of the display faces the keyboard. 4. Press the center latch down to lock the display. file://C:\TamaTemp\usetab.HTM\usetab.HTM 2006/10/16 Using the tablet mode 2/2 Note: Do not rotate, twist, or bend the center latch of the display. Your computer is now in the tablet mode. To return your ThinkPad computer to the notebook mode, do as follows:

Unlatch the display latch and open the display by at least 45 degrees, preferably by 90 degrees. Then rotate the display slowly counter-clockwise until the front of the display is facing the keyboard. Your computer is now in the notebook mode. Tips on using your computer in the tablet mode

To close the computer display, first make sure that the display either faces the keyboard or is positioned at 180 degrees to the keyboard, so that the back of the display faces the keyboard.

Do not pick up or hold the computer by the display only.

Do not hit, vibrate, or bump the computer display.

To allow free ventilation, do not place any obstacle, such as a thick-piled carpet or a soft cushion,

When you use the computer in the picture frame mode, hold the display with one hand and use in front of the fan. the Tablet Digitizer Pen.

If you hold the computer with one hand while using it in the tablet mode, do not expose it to excessive vibration, shock, or rotation.

Do not use the computer outdoors. Do not expose it to rain.

If you put your computer in a carrying case, put it into notebook mode and close the display. file://C:\TamaTemp\usetab.HTM\usetab.HTM 2006/10/16 Using the Tablet Digitizer Pen and the touch panel feature 1/3 Using the Tablet Digitizer Pen and the touch panel feature The Tablet Digitizer Pen and its accessories are shipped in a separate box within the ThinkPad(R) shipping box. You can use the pen to control your computer just as you would with a mouse or keyboard. Note: This pen is not waterproof. Take care not to soak it or dip it in water. You can store the pen in the slot on the left side of the ThinkPad computer. Press it gently into the slot until you hear a click. To remove the pen from its slot, press it gently into the slot (1) to release it; then pull it out (2). Note: The pen contains pressure sensors. Do not push the tip of the pen for an extended period of time. Do not subject the pen to shock or vibration. The Tablet Digitizer Pen consists of a tip (2), a click button (3), and an eraser tip (4). Hold the pen and point the tip at the display to move the cursor (1). To make a selection (single click), tap the display once with the pen. To double-click, tap twice without pausing. To do a right-click, tap the display once and then hold the tip of the pen on the display; the right-

click icon appears. Pressing the click button (3) is the same as a right-click. The eraser tip (4) functions like an eraser in applications that support this function. Note: You can enable or disable the pen buttons in the Tablet and Pen Settings panel of the Tablet Shortcut Menu. Note: The Digitizer Pen shipped with the ThinkPad X60 Tablet computer is for use with that computer only. Do not insert it into the pen slot of the ThinkPad X41 Tablet computer. Note: The Digitizer Pen shipped with the ThinkPad X41 Tablet computer is for use with that computer only. Do not insert it into the pen slot of the ThinkPad X60 Tablet computer. file://C:\TamaTemp\tabpen.HTM\tabpen.HTM 2006/10/16 Using the Tablet Digitizer Pen and the touch panel feature 2/3 Besides functioning as a basic selection tool, the Tablet Digitizer Pen also enables you to write text or draw on the screen, as you would with a pen on paper. Different methods of input can be chosen from the Tablet PC Input Panel on the Windows taskbar. To configure the Tablet Digitizer Pen settings, use the Tablet and Pen Settings panel of the Tablet Shortcut Menu. Replacing the Tablet Digitizer Pen tip The tip of the Tablet Digitizer Pen may wear out. Replacement tips and a tip removal tool are included in the pen box shipped with your computer. Note: Your computer is shipped with five replacement tips for the Digitizer Pen. Be sure to store the pen tips in a secure place for future use. The pen tips will not be covered under the warranty for the digitizer pen or the computer. To replace a pen tip, do as follows:

1. Grip the pen tip with the tip removal tool, and pull it out. 2. Insert a replacement pen tip fully into the Tablet Digitizer Pen. Using the touch panel Some modes have the touch panel feature. The touch panel feature makes the interaction with your ThinkPad computer even more natural, because you can use your finger instead of a pen for navigation on the go. file://C:\TamaTemp\tabpen.HTM\tabpen.HTM 2006/10/16 Using the Tablet Digitizer Pen and the touch panel feature 3/3 To make a selection (single click), tap the display once with your finger. To double-click, tap twice without pausing. To do a right-click, tap the display once and then hold your finger on the display until the right-

click icon appears. Tips on using the touch panel

The touch panel is a glass panel covered with a plastic film. For input you can use either your finger of the Tablet Digitizer Pen shipped with your computer. Do not use any pen other than the specified one, or any metallic object, because to do so might damage the touch panel or cause it to malfunction.

If you put your computer in a carrying case, put it into notebook mode and close the display. Do not carry your computer in tablet mode.

If you use both your finger and the Tablet Digitizer Pen simultaneously for input to the screen, only data entered by use of the Digitizer Pen will be processed.

If you use your finger to input to the touch panel, touch only one point at a time. If you touch several points simulatneously, the input will not be processed correctly.

With the touch panel, gradually a discrepancy may start to appear between the point you touched with your finger during the finger point, and its actual position on the screen. To avoid this, regularly correct the accuracy of the finger input by use of the touch panel Settings Utility. Cleaning the touch panel display 1. To remove fingerprints, etc., from the touch panel display, use a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. (A piece of absorbent cotton will also serve the purpose.) Do not apply solvents to the cloth. 2. Gently wipe foreign particles and dust from the touch panel with one side of the cloth. 3. Wipe smudges or fingerprints with the other side of the cloth, or with a clean cloth. 4. After using the cloth, wash it with a neutral detergent. file://C:\TamaTemp\tabpen.HTM\tabpen.HTM 2006/10/16

 

 

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Document Part Number: 384459-003 May 2005 Contents 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice . 2 Modifications. 2 Cables . 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States Only) . 3 Products with wireless LAN devices. 4 Brazilian notice . 5 Canadian notices . 6 Avis Canadien . 6 European Union notices . 6 Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices . 8 Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices. 9 Ergonomics notice . 9 Indian notice. 9 Japanese notices . 10 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices . 10 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices . 11 Bluetooth devices . 11 Korean notice . 11 Taiwan notice . 11 Airline travel notice . 12 Battery notices . 12 Energy Star compliance . 12 Laser safety notices . 13 CDRH regulations . 13 Laser information . 13 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices ii Contents Modem notices . 14 Telecommunications device approvals . 15 U.S. modem statements . 15 Canadian modem statements . 18 Japanese modem statements . 18 New Zealand modem statements. 19 Power cord notice. 21 Japanese power cord notice . 21 Macrovision Corporation notice . 21 2 Safety notices Travel notice. 23 Battery notices . 23 Power cord notices . 24 3 Environmental notices Battery disposal . 25 United States mercury disposal . 25 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union . 26 Index iii Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for your computer. Some notices may not apply to your computer. Your computer model may be shipped with one or more integrated wireless devices installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device, such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, on your computer, open the Device Manager utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Select the Hardware tab, and then select Device Manager. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices installed on your computer. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 1 Regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about your product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 3 Regulatory notices Products with wireless LAN devices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebooks. During normal operation of tablet PCs: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). During normal operation of notebooks: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. 4 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Brazilian notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Unless the computer has an Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN radio or an Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN radio, the Brazilian certification mark is located on the bottom of the notebook. The Intel PRO/Wireless 2100 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200 Wireless LAN has the certification mark below:

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 5 Regulatory notices Canadian notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Wireless operation is subject to 2 conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of the following EU Directive:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC 6 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards (European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product. This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications, EU harmonized telecommunications products such as Bluetooth. This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.

(xxxx*)

*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 7 Regulatory notices Products with 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5-MHz (Chaine 1013). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, only the 2454-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 10 through 13) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with the General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management

(Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). 8 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Products with 5-GHz wireless LAN devices Frequency availability for 802.11a or 802.11h wireless LAN is not currently harmonized throughout the European Union. For compliance requirements, users should verify compliance with their supplier, local HP office, or telecommunications authority. Ergonomics notice German Computers bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. Computers in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Indian notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning & Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 9 Regulatory notices Japanese notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices 2. 4DS 4 10 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Regulatory notices 2. 4OF 4 Bluetooth devices 2 . 4 F H 1 Korean notice Taiwan notice Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 11 Regulatory notices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. For information about removing a battery pack, refer to your computer documentation. Energy Star compliance Computers bearing the Energy Star logo are compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. 12 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Laser safety notices All systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. CDRH regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products effective August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976, onward. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. Laser information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 degrees 1.5 degrees Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 13 Regulatory notices Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly and module-level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. Modem notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45

(network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 14 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in your computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the documentation included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country in which the product is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause your modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, your modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when you select a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 15 Regulatory notices The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call Customer Care. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. 16 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 17 Regulatory notices Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements Unless the computer has an Agere modem or a Conexant modem, the appropriate Japanese certification mark is located on the modem label on the bottom of the computer. An Agere modem has the following Japanese certification mark located on the modem label on the bottom of the computer:

A Conexant modem has the following Japanese certification mark located on the modem label on the bottom of the computer. 18 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices New Zealand modem statements Regulatory notices The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 19 Regulatory notices Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specifications. a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service. 20 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Regulatory notices Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for your computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with your computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the products electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your service partner. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japanese power cord notice Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 21 2 Safety notices Travel notice WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Battery notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack; short the external contacts on a battery pack; or dispose of a battery pack in fire or water. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures above 60C (140F). WARNING: Keep the battery pack away from children. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery pack provided with the computer, a replacement battery pack provided by HP, or a compatible battery pack purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 23 Safety notices Power cord notices WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the notebook by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the notebook). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin; for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 24 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country-specific environmental notices and compliance information for your computer. Some notices may not apply to your computer. Battery disposal N WARNING: When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery pack in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery pack disposal. In Europe, dispose of or recycle the battery packs by using the public collection system or by returning them to HP, your service partner, or their agents. United States mercury disposal This computer contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the computer display, which may require special handling when the computer has reached the end of its useful life. Because of environmental considerations, local authorities may regulate the disposal of the mercury. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www.eiae.org. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices 25 Environmental notices Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. 26 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index disposal notices battery 25 equipment 26 mercury 25 E Energy Star compliance 12 environmental notices 25 equipment disposal notice 26 ergonomics notice 9 European Union notices 6 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 France, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 8 G Germany, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 9 H hardware device, identifying 1 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 8 5-GHz wireless LAN devices 9 A airline travel notice 12 B battery disposal notice 25 battery notice 12, 23 Brazilian notice 5 C cables, Federal Communications Commission 2 Canadian modem statement 18 Canadian notices 6 Center for Devices and Radiological Health 13 D Declaration of Conformity 3 devices hardware, identifying 1 wireless LAN 4 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Index1 I Indian notice 9 Italy, 2.4-GHz wireless LAN devices 8 J Japanese modem statement 18 Japanese notice 10 Japanese power cord notice 21 K Korean notice 11 L laser information 13 laser safety notice 13 M Macrovision Corporation notice 21 mercury disposal notice 25 modem notices 14 modem statements Canadian 18 Japanese 18 New Zealand 19 U.S. 15 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 19 notices airline travel 12 battery 12, 23, 25 Brazilian 5 Canadian 6 environmental 25 equipment disposal 26 ergonomics 9 European Union 6 Federal Communications Commission 2 Indian 9 Japanese 10 Japanese power cord 21 Korean 11 laser safety 13 Macrovision Corporation 21 mercury disposal 25 modem 14 power cords 21, 24 Taiwan 11 travel 23 P power cord notice 21, 24 T Taiwan notice 11 telecommunications device approvals 15 travel notice 23 U U.S. modem statement 15 V voice support 20 W wireless LAN devices 4 Index2 Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Copyright 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices Third Edition May 2005 Document Part Number: 384459-003

 

 

DRAFT Revised: 7/6/05 File: Title.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Notebook Tour Document Part Number: 396323-001 December 2005 This guide explains the computer hardware features. hp CONFIDENTIAL July 6, 2005 9:13 am DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: 396323-001TOC.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Contents 1 Components Top components . 2 Lights . 2 TouchPad . 4 Buttons and switches . 5 Keys . 7 Hotkey quick reference . 8 Front components. 9 Rear components . 10 Right-side components. 11 Left-side components . 12 Bottom components . 13 WLAN antennae. 16 WWAN antennae . 17 Additional hardware components . 18 Labels . 19 2 Specifications Operating Environment . 21 Rated Input Power . 22 Index Notebook Tour ii hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 1 Components This guide explains the hardware features of the computer. To see a list of installed hardware on the computer:

1. Select Start > My Computer. 2. In the System Tasks window in the left pane, select View system information. 3. Select Hardware tab > Device Manager. You can also add hardware or modify your device configurations using Device Manager. Notebook Tour 1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Top components Lights Component 1 Power lights* (2) 2 Wireless lights (2) Description Green: The computer is on. Blinking green: The computer is in standby. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network

(LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device is turned on. 2 hp CONFIDENTIAL

(Continued) Notebook Tour DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Component 3 Caps lock light 4 Num lock light Description On: Caps lock is on. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. 5 Volume mute light On: System sound is turned off. 6 Battery light Amber: A battery pack is charging. Green: A battery pack is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery pack that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking more quickly. Off: If the computer is plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an external power source, the light is turned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 7 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light Blinking: The hard drive or optical drive is being accessed.

*There are 2 power lights. Both display the same information. The light on the power button is visible only when the computer is open; the other power light is always visible on the front of the computer. There are 2 wireless lights. Both display the same information. The light on the wireless button is visible only when the computer is open; the other wireless light is always visible on the front of the computer. Notebook Tour 3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components TouchPad Component 1 TouchPad*

2 Left TouchPad button*

3 Right TouchPad button*

Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perform other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clicking. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 4 TouchPad scroll zone*

Scrolls up or down.

*This table describes default settings. 4 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Buttons and switches Components Component 1 Power button*

2 Display switch Description When the computer is Off, press to turn on the computer. In standby, briefly press to exit standby. In hibernation, briefly press to exit hibernation. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. Initiates standby if the display is closed while the computer is on.

(Continued) Notebook Tour 5 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Component 3 Info Center button 4 Wireless button*

Description Launches Info Center, which enables you to open the following software solutions: Altiris Local Recovery, Contact HP, Help and Support, Accessories Product Tour (Options Demo), ProtectTools Security Manager, Software Setup, System Information, and Wireless Assistant. Turns the wireless feature on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 5 Presentation mode button Turns on Presentation mode. 6 Volume mute button Mutes system sound. 7 Volume down button Decreases system volume. 8 Volume up button Increases system volume.

*This table describes default settings. 6 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Keys Components Component 1 esc key 2 fn key 3 Windows logo key 4 Windows applications key Description Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. Displays the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer.

(Continued) Notebook Tour 7 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Component Description 5 Embedded numeric keypad keys 6 Function keys Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Execute frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Refer to the table in Hotkey quick reference for a description of each hotkey. Hotkey quick reference To perform this function Initiate standby Resume from standby Alternate between computer display and external display Display battery information Clear battery information Decrease screen brightness Increase screen brightness Display system information Clear system information Press fn+f3 Power button fn+f4 fn+f8 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+esc fn+esc or press OK 8 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Front components Components Component Description 1 Display release latch Opens the computer. 2 Infrared port Provides wireless communication between the computer and an optional IrDA-compliant device. 3 Speakers (2) Produce system sound. 4 6-in-1 Digital Media Slot Supports 6 optional digital card formats: SD (Secure Digital) Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro, SmartMedia card, and xD-Picture Card. 5 6-in-1 Digital Media Slot light On: A digital card is being accessed. Notebook Tour 9 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Rear components Component Description 1 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Power connector 3 Parallel port 4 S-Video-out jack Connects an AC adapter or an optional power adapter. Connects an optional printer. Connects an optional S-Video device such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card. 10 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Right-side components Components Component Description 1 Audio-out (headphone) jack 2 Audio-in (microphone) jack 3 USB ports (2) Produces system stereo sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, ear buds, headset, or television audio. Connects an optional headset microphone or a monaural microphone. Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant devices to the computer using a standard USB cable. Either port can also connect an optional External MultiBay II to the computer. The MultiBay II must be plugged into an external power source. 4 Optical drive Reads an optical disc. 5 Optical drive button Releases the media tray. 6 Serial port Connects an optional serial device. Notebook Tour 11 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Left-side components Component 1 USB ports (2) Description Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant devices to the computer using a standard USB cable. Either port can also connect an optional External MultiBay II to the computer. The MultiBay II must be plugged into an external power source. 2 External monitor port Connects an external monitor. 3 Exhaust vent Provides airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cable. 5 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. 6 1394 port Connects an optional IEEE 1394 device, such as a camcorder. 12 hp CONFIDENTIAL

(Continued) Notebook Tour DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Component 7 PC Card slots (2) Components Description Support optional Type I, Type II, or Type III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. Some models may be shipped with a smart card reader in the bottom card slot. 8 PC Card slot eject buttons (2) Eject the PC Cards from the PC Card slots. Bottom components Notebook Tour 13 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Component Description 1 Hard drive bay Holds the hard drive. 2 Expansion memory module and Mini PCI compartment Contains the expansion memory module slot and a wireless LAN device. To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, replace only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you replace a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore notebook functionality. Then contact Customer Care. To contact Customer Care, click Contact a Technician in the Help and Support Center. Editors Note: On theDavos 2.0 I worked on, Contact a Technician is not showing up in Help and Support. Will it be there?

3 Travel battery connector Connects an optional travel battery. 4 Primary battery pack release latches (2) Release the primary battery pack from the battery bay. 5 Primary battery bay Holds the primary battery pack. 6 Docking connector Connects the computer to an optional docking device. 14 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Component Description 7 Exhaust vents (2 or 3)*

Provides airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

*Depending on your computer model, the vents on the computer may vary in number and location. Notebook Tour 15 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components WLAN antennae Two wireless antennae inside the display closure send and receive wireless device signals over wireless local area networks

(WLANs). These antennae are not visible from the outside of the computer. 16 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components WWAN antennae Two wireless antennae inside the display enclosure allow you to connect to a wireless wide-area network (WWAN), and then to the Internet, using the integrated HP Broadband Wireless module and service from a supported cellular network operator. For more information on HP Broadband Wireless and how to sign up for service, refer to the HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started guide that shipped with your computer. Notebook Tour 17 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components Additional hardware components Component 1 AC adapter 2 Power cord*

3 Primary battery pack*

4 Modem cable*

Description Converts AC power to DC power. Connects an AC adapter to an AC outlet. Powers the computer when the computer is not plugged into external power. Connects an internal modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter.

*Modem cables, battery packs, and power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 18 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Labels Components The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service tagProvides the product name, product number

(P/N), and serial number (S/N) of your computer. Have this information available when you contact Customer Care. The service tag label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Microsoft Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. This certificate is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Modem approval labelProvides regulatory information about the modem and lists the agency approval markings required by some of the countries in which the modem has been approved for use. You may need this information when traveling internationally. The modem approval label is affixed to the bottom of the computer. Wireless certification labelsProvides information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings on some of the countries in which the devices have been approved for use. An optional device may be a wireless local area network

(WLAN) device or an optional Bluetooth device. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one certification label is included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed to the bottom of the computer. EDITORS NOTE: Do I need to rework the above bullet to add the WWAN label location, which will be located on the inside of the battery compartment (per Dean Dutterer)?

Notebook Tour 19 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Components 20 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 8/15/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-396323-001 2 Specifications The following sections provide information on the operating environment specifications and power specifications of the computer. Operating Environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is another unit of measurement for altitude. Notebook Tour 21 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 8/15/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Specifications Rated Input Power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, it is strongly recommended that the computer be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power cord supplied by or approved for an HP computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 22 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: 396323-001IX.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Index optical drive 111 PC Card slot eject 113 power 15 Presentation mode 16 TouchPad 14 volume 16 wireless 16 C cables modem 112 network 112 RJ-11 (modem) 118 USB 111, 112 caps lock light 13 Certificate of Authenticity label 119 compartments expansion memory module 114 compartments, Mini PCI 114 components bottom 113 front 19 left-side 112 rear 110 right-side 111 top 12 1394 port 112 6-in-1 Digital Media Slot light 19 6-in-1 Digital Media Slot, location 19 A AC adapter, identifying 118 altitude specifications 221 antennae 116, 117 applications key, Windows 17 audio-in (microphone) jack 111 audio-out (headphone) jack 111 B battery bay 114, 119 battery light, identifying 13 battery pack release latch 114 battery pack, identifying 118 bays battery 114, 119 hard drive 114 Bluetooth label 119 buttons Info Center 16 mute 16 Notebook Tour Index1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: 396323-001IX.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Index connectors docking 114 power 110 travel battery 114 cord, power, identifying 118 D digital cards 19 display release latch 19 display switch, identifying 15 docking connector 114 drives, optical 111 E eject button, PC Card slot 113 environmental specifications 221 exhaust vents 112, 115 external monitor port 112 F fn key 17 function keys 18 H hard drive bay, identifying 114 headphone (audio-out) jack 111 hotkey commands initiate standby 18 hotkeys, Quick Reference 18 humidity specifications 221 I IDE drive light 13 IEEE 1394 port 112 Info Center button 16 infrared port 19 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 111 audio-out (headphone) 111 RJ-11 (modem) 112 RJ-45 (network) 112 S-Video-out 110 K keypad keys 18 keys esc 17 fn 17 function 18 keypad 18 Windows applications 17 Windows logo 17 L labels Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 119 modem approval 119 regulatory 119 service tag 119 wireless certification 119 WLAN 119 latches battery pack release 114 display release 19 lights 6-in-1 Digital Media Slot 19 Index2 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: 396323-001IX.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Index battery 13 caps lock 13 IDE drive 13 mute 13 num lock 13 power 12 wireless 12 lock, security cable 110 M memory module compartment, expansion 114 Memory Stick 19 Memory Stick Pro 19 microphone (audio-in) jack 111 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 119 Mini PCI compartment 114 modem approval label 119 modem cable 112 monitor port, external 112 MultiMediaCard 19 mute button 16 mute light 13 N network (RJ-45) jack 112 network cable 112 num lock light 13 O operating environment specifications 221 operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 119 Product Key 119 optical drive button 111 optical drive, identifying 111 optional power adapter 110 P parallel port 110 PC Card slot 113 PC Card slot eject button 113 ports 1394 112 external monitor 112 infrared 19 parallel 110 serial 111 USB 111, 112 power button 15 power connector 110 power cord 118 power light 12 Presentation mode button 16 Product Key 119 product name and number, computer 119 R rated input power specifications 222 regulatory information modem approval label 119 regulatory label 119 wireless certification labels 119 release latch battery pack 114 display 19 Notebook Tour Index3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/15/05 File: 396323-001IX.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Index RJ-11 (modem) cable 118 RJ-11 (modem) jack 112 RJ-45 (network) jack 112 S scrolling regions, TouchPad 14 Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card 19 security cable slot 110 serial number, computer 119 serial port 111 service tag 119 slots 6-in-1 Digital Media 19 memory 114 PC Card 113 security cable 110 SmartMedia (SM) card 19 speakers 19 specifications operating environment 221 rated input power 222 S-Video-out jack 110 switches display 15 identifying 15 modem approval label 119 wireless certification labels 119 U USB cable 111, 112 USB ports, identifying 111, 112 V vents, exhaust 112, 115 volume buttons 16 W Windows applications key 17 Windows logo key 17 wireless antennae 116, 117 wireless button 16 wireless certification label 119 wireless light 12 WLAN label 119 X xD-Picture Card 19 T temperature specifications 221 TouchPad 14 travel battery connector 114 traveling with computer environmental specifications 222 Index4 Notebook Tour hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 6/3/05 File: Notice-Back.fm PN: HP-396323-001 Copyright 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Notebook Tour First Edition December 2005 Document Part Number: 396323-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL June 3, 2005 9:09 am

 

 

397635-001.book Page i Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/22/05 PN: H397635-001 File: Title.fm HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started Document Part Number: 397635-001 December 2005 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page ii Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/22/05 PN: H397635-001 File: Title.fm hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page ii Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H397635-001 File: 397635-001TOC.fm Contents Creating an HP Broadband Wireless Connection 4 Getting Help 7 hp CONFIDENTIAL ii 397635-001.book Page iii Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H397635-001 File: 397635-001TOC.fm hp CONFIDENTIAL iii 397635-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 File: Book.fm Welcome to HP Broadband Wireless Thank you for purchasing an HP Broadband Wireless computer. Your new computer, when used with Verizon Wireless BroadbandAccess service, gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road, across town, or across the country. Because everything you need is already installed on the computer, and you can easily sign up for Verizon Wireless BroadbandAccess service, you can quickly begin to experience the benefits of HP Broadband Wireless. hp CONFIDENTIAL 1 397635-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 File: Book.fm Service for the HP Broadband Wireless computer is provided by Verizon Wireless. There are two types of service:

BroadbandAccess: BroadbandAccess is a fast, wide-area wireless Internet service, which allows you to quickly download complex files, and view and download e-mail attachments at broadband-like speeds, averaging between 300 to 500 Kbps, with bursts up to 2 Mbps. BroadbandAccess is available in many metropolitan areas across the United States. NationalAccess: NationalAccess is the Verizon Wireless national wireless Internet service. You can access the Internet and business applications, and view and download e-mail attachments at typical speeds averaging between 60 to 80 kbps, with bursts up to 144 kbps. NationalAccess is available in thousands of cities and towns, and many rural areas across the United States. hp CONFIDENTIAL 2 397635-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 U-Unbranded Part Number File: Book.fm You do not have to worry about the type of service area you are located in. A BroadbandAccess or NationalAccess connection will be created when you connect to the Verizon Wireless Network. The default connection will always be at the highest available speed. BroadbandAccess will be used whenever it is available, and your connection will automatically switch between BroadbandAccess and NationalAccess as you move between coverage areas. The Venturi compression application is available for use with the HP Broadband Wireless solution. Venturi is a wireless data optimization solution that can improve the way data is transmitted over the Verizon Wireless network and help to deliver faster mobile Internet file downloads. The Venturi client can be installed at: EDITORS NOTE - CAN THIS BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE START BUTTON?

3 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 Creating an HP Broadband Wireless Connection File: Book.fm To create an HP Broadband Wireless connection, you must run the VZAccess Manager application that is preinstalled on the computer. To access VZAccess Manager:

1. Select Start > VZAccess Manager. or Select Start > All Programs > VZAccess Manager. hp CONFIDENTIAL 4 397635-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 U-Unbranded Part Number File: Book.fm 2. In the VZAccess Manager window, click Connect. If you do not have a pre-existing account and you are in a BroadbandAccess coverage area, you will be directed to the Verizon QuickAccess page, where you can sign up for Verizon Wireless service. If you are not in a BroadbandAccess coverage area, a message displays, providing a toll-free number so you can call Verizon Wireless to activate an account. If you have already signed up for Verizon BroadbandAccess, you are connected to the Internet and can begin using the Internet immediately. You do not need to complete the following steps. 5 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 File: Book.fm 3. On the QuickAccess page, choose the VZAccess plan you want to use, and follow the on-screen instructions. The following service plans are available:

Unlimited monthly access: Unlimited monthly access requires a 1- or 2-year contract. This is the recommended plan for most users, because it is the best value for those who regularly connect to the Internet. Unlimited daily access: No contract is required for the unlimited daily access. Users get 24 hours of service for a flat fee, and users can sign up for unlimited daily access as often as needed. This plan is recommended for those who will use BroadbandAccess infrequently. The information you provide is transmitted over a secure connection. In some cases, credit checks may require additional verification time. You can also review the customer agreement, coverage maps, and frequently asked questions. hp CONFIDENTIAL 6 397635-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: C-CPQ Part Number H-397635-001 U-Unbranded Part Number File: Book.fm 4. After establishing your Verizon Wireless account, follow the on-screen instructions to connect to the Internet. 5. To end your Internet connection, click Disconnect in VZAccess Manager. After your Verizon Wireless account is established, you can manage the account online, including checking balances and making payments. Getting Help For additional information and technical support for VZAccess Manager and Verizon wireless devices:

Refer to the Verizon Wireless VZAccess Manager Quick Reference Guide that came with the computer. Refer to the VZAccess Manager online help. Access Frequently Asked Questions on the Verizon Wireless QuickAccess page. 7 hp CONFIDENTIAL 397635-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H-397635-001 File: Book.fm hp CONFIDENTIAL 8 397635-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 23, 2005 11:02 AM DRAFT - Revised: 8/23/05 PN: H397635-001 File: Notice-Back.fm Copyright 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Verizon Wireless is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services LLC. VZACCESS and Quick 2 Net are service marks of Verizon Wireless. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition December 2005 397635-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL

 

 

DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Title.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Getting Started HP Compaq Notebook Series Document Part Number: 403067-001 December 2005 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, and begin using the computer in Microsoft Windows. hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Notice-Front.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Copyright 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Getting Started HP Compaq Notebook Series First Edition December 2005 Document Part Number: 403067-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001TOC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Contents 1 First-time setup Identify hardware . 11 Computer hardware . 11 Top components . 12 Keys . 13 TouchPad . 14 Front components . 15 Rear components . 16 Right-side components . 16 Left-side components . 17 Bottom components. 18 Set up the computer . 19 Step 1: Insert the battery pack . 110 Step 2: Connect the computer to external power. 111 Step 3: Turn on the computer . 113 Step 4: Set up the software . 115 2 Next steps Install additional hardware and software . 21 Protect the computer . 21 Protect the computer from viruses. 21 Protect your system files . 22 Protect your privacy. 22 Protect the computer from power surges. 23 Use the computer safely . 23 Connect to a computer network . 25 Getting Started v hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001TOC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Contents Update your software . 26 Locate the user guides . 26 Turn off the computer correctly . 27 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources . 31 Quick troubleshooting . 32 Is the computer unable to start up? . 32 Is the computer screen blank? . 33 Is software functioning abnormally? . 34 Is the computer unresponsive? . 35 Is the computer overheating?. 36 Is an external device not working? . 37 Help and Support Center . 38 Customer Care . 39 Preparing to contact Customer Care . 39 Contacting Customer Care by e-mail or telephone . 310 A Specifications Operating Environment . A1 Rated Input Power . A2 B System recovery Safeguarding your data . B1 Using Altiris Local Recovery (select models only) . B1 Using System Restore points . B2 Creating a System Restore Point . B3 Restoring to a restore point . B3 Reinstalling applications . B3 Reinstalling applications from the hard drive . B4 Reinstalling applications from discs . B4 Repairing the operating system . B5 Reinstalling the operating system . B6 Reinstalling device drivers and other software . B7 vi Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001TOC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Contents C Connect to the Internet from your home Choose an ISP . C1 Using the Internet Connection Wizard . C2 Choose the type of Internet access . C3 Index Getting Started vii hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001TOC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Contents viii Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 1 First-time setup Identify hardware Computer hardware Component 1 AC adapter 2 Power cord 3 Primary battery pack 4 Modem cable Getting Started 11 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup Top components Component 1 Power light 2 Power button 3 Display switch 8 Caps lock light 9 Num lock light

- Volume mute button 4 Info Center button q Volume mute light 5 Wireless button 6 Wireless light w Volume down button

= Volume up button 7 Presentation mode button 12 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Keys First-time setup Component 1 esc key 2 fn key 4 Windows applications key 5 Embedded numeric keypad keys 3 Windows logo key 6 Function keys Getting Started 13 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup TouchPad Component 1 TouchPad 3 TouchPad scroll zone 2 Left TouchPad button 4 Right TouchPad button 14 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Front components First-time setup Component 1 Wireless light 2 Power light 3 Battery light 4 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light 5 Display release latch 6 Infrared port 7 Speakers (2) 8 6-in-1 Digital Media Slot 9 6-in-1 Digital Media Slot light Getting Started 15 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup Rear components Component 1 Security cable slot 3 Parallel port 2 Power connector 4 S-Video-out jack Right-side components Component 1 Audio-out (headphone) jack 4 Optical drive 2 Audio-in (microphone) jack 5 Optical drive button 3 USB ports (2) 6 Serial port 16 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Left-side components First-time setup Component 1 USB ports (2) 5 RJ-45 (network) jack 2 External monitor port 6 1394 port 3 Exhaust vent 7 PC Card slots (2) 4 RJ-11 (modem) jack 8 PC Card slot eject buttons (2) Getting Started 17 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup Bottom components Component 1 Hard drive bay 5 Primary battery bay 2 Expansion memory module and Mini PCI compartment 6 Docking connector 3 Travel battery connector 7 Exhaust vents (4) 4 Primary battery pack release latches (2) 18 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Set up the computer First-time setup CAUTION: To prevent file corruption and to ensure that the correct drivers are installed:

Do not set up the computer for the first time while the computer is docked in an optional docking device. During the hardware and software setup procedures:

Do not unplug the computer from external power. Do not shut down the computer or initiate standby or hibernation. When setting up the computer, you will 1. Insert the battery pack into the computer so that it can begin to charge as soon as the computer is connected to external power. 2. Connect the computer to external power. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Set up the software. Getting Started 19 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup Step 1: Insert the battery pack To insert a primary battery pack:

1. Turn the computer upside down. 2. Slide the battery pack 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. The battery pack release latches 2 automatically lock the battery into place. 110 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup Step 2: Connect the computer to external power To connect the computer to external AC power:

1. Plug the AC adapter cable 1 into the power connector.

(The power connector is on the rear of the computer.) 2. Plug the power cord 2 into the AC adapter, and then into an AC outlet 3. When the computer receives AC power, the battery pack begins to charge and the battery light (on the front of the computer) 4 is turned on. When the battery pack is fully charged, the battery light is turned off. Getting Started 111 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup It is recommended that you leave the computer connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged and the battery light is turned off. (A partially charged new battery pack can run the computer after software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery pack has been fully charged.) Power cords and AC outlets vary in appearance by region and country. 112 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup Step 3: Turn on the computer To open the computer:

1. Slide the display release latch 1 to the right to release the display. 2. Raise the display 2. Getting Started 113 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup 3. Press the power button 1. The power light next to the power button 2 and the power light on the front of the computer 3 are turned on, and you are prompted to begin software setup. 114 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup Step 4: Set up the software After the computer is turned on, it will go through a brief software setup. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the software. Note the following:

After you respond to the setup prompt, you must complete the entire setup process without interruption. Setup time varies. During software setup, it is normal for some computer models to pause occasionally for several minutes. These normal pauses are indicated by an hourglass icon. CAUTION: If you are prompted to select an operating system language before the Welcome to Windows page is displayed, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during software setup. To register your operating system and your computer, you must be connected to the Internet. For more information about connecting to the Internet, refer to Appendix C, Connect to the Internet from your home in this guide. If you do not send your registration during software setup, you can do so at any time after software setup is complete. Getting Started 115 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-403067-001 First-time setup 116 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 2 Next steps Install additional hardware and software To install additional hardware, such as an optional printer, follow the instructions provided by the hardware manufacturer to install any drivers required by the device. Install new software by inserting the software disc into the optical drive and follow the on-screen instructions. Protect the computer The information in this section is designed to protect the computer from damage caused by a virus, a security breach, a power surge, or unsafe operation. Protect the computer from viruses When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, you expose it to computer viruses that can disable the operating system, applications, or utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Getting Started 21 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Next steps Norton AntiVirus is preinstalled on the computer. For information about using the Norton AntiVirus software, click Start > All Programs > Norton AntiVirus > Help and Support. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search field in the Help and Support Center. Protect your system files System Restore is an operating system feature that allows you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state, called a restore point. You can manually create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. It is recommended that you manually create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. For more information about setting and restoring from restore points, refer to Using System Restore points in, Appendix B, System recovery. Protect your privacy When you use the computer for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you or your computer. To optimize the privacy protection features included with the computer, it is recommended that you Keep your operating system and software updated. Many software applications contain security enhancements. For information about updating your operating system and software, refer to Update your software later in this chapter. Use a firewall. A firewall is software that monitors incoming traffic on the computer. Some firewalls also monitor outgoing traffic. 22 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Next steps Protect the computer from power surges To protect the computer from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm:

Plug the computer power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. During an electrical storm, either run the computer on battery power or shut down the computer and unplug the power cord. If applicable to your location, provide surge protection on the modem cable that connects the modem to a telephone line. Telephone line surge protectors are available from computer or electronic retailers in some regions. Use the computer safely WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on your power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin; for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. Getting Started 23 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Next steps WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety and Comfort Guide (not available in all languages). It describes proper workstation setup; and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety and Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo, and in the Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. WARNING: To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the computer on your lap for extended periods. The computer is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the computer to feel warm or hot when used continuously. The computer complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). WARNING: To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter or battery pack provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter or battery pack provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter or battery pack purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. For more safety and regulatory information, refer to Regulatory and Safety Notices located in the Help and Support Center. To access the Help and Support Center, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. 24 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Next steps Connect to a computer network The computer may have the following networking capabilities:

Local area network (LAN) Wireless local area network (WLAN) Wireless wide-area network (WWAN) Contact your network administrator to connect the computer to a company LAN or WLAN. If you plan to connect the computer to a home office LAN or WLAN, you must have a router or wireless router. Refer to the documentation that came with the router for additional information, or refer to the Help and Support Center for information on networking. For information on connecting to a WWAN, refer to the HP Broadband Wireless Getting Started guide that came with the computer. For information on connecting the computer to the Internet when you are not connected to a network, refer to Appendix C, Connect to the Internet from your home. Getting Started 25 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Next steps Update your software Most software, including the operating system, is updated frequently by the manufacturer or provider. Important updates to the software included with the computer may have been released since the computer left the factory. Some updates may affect the way the computer responds to optional software or external devices. Many updates provide security enhancements. It is strongly recommended that you update the operating system and other software provided on the computer as soon as the computer is connected to the Internet. To access update links for the operating system and other software provided on the computer:

Select Start > Help and Support. Locate the user guides User guides, regulatory and safety notices, and other resources that provide information about using the computer are available through the Help and Support Center (select Start > Help and Support > User Guides), or on a User Guides disc included with some models. For more information about the resources available through the Help and Support Center, refer to Help and Support Center in Chapter 3, Troubleshooting. 26 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Next steps Turn off the computer correctly Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard Windows shutdown procedure:

4. Save your work and close all open applications. 5. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. Depending on your network connections, the Turn Off Computer button may be called the Shut Down button. If the system is unresponsive and you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, use the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery pack. Getting Started 27 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Next steps 28 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources If you experience computer problems with your computer, try the following suggestions in the order listed below and presented in this chapter:

1. Refer to Quick troubleshooting, next in this chapter. 2. Access the Help and Support Center for additional information about your computer. Select Start > Help and Support. Although many checkup and repair features require an Internet connection, many other features can help you fix a problem while the computer is offline. 3. Visit the technical support Web site at http://www.hp.com/support for answers to common questions. 4. Contact Customer Care for any further assistance. Getting Started 31 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Troubleshooting Quick troubleshooting Is the computer unable to start up?

To turn on the computer, press the power button. When the computer is turned on, the power light is turned on. If the computer and the power light are not turned on when you press the power button, adequate power may not be available to the computer. If the computer is running on battery power or is connected to an external power source other than an AC outlet, connect the computer into an AC outlet using the AC adapter. Make sure the power cord and AC adapter connections are secure. Verify that the AC outlet is providing adequate power by plugging another electrical device into the outlet. If the computer can be turned on when connected to external power but cannot be turned on when running on a battery pack, recharge the battery pack. 32 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Is the computer screen blank?

Troubleshooting If you have not turned off the computer but the screen is blank, the computer may be in standby or hibernation, may not be set to display the image on the computer screen, or the display switch or ambient light sensor (select models only) may not be functioning properly. The suggested actions below may help you determine the reason the computer screen is blank. To resume from standby or restore from hibernation, briefly press the power button. Standby and hibernation are energy-saving features that can turn off the display. Standby and hibernation can be initiated by the system while the computer is in Microsoft Windows but is not in use. To change these and other power settings, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. To transfer the image to the computer screen, press fn+f4. On most models, when an optional external display device, such as a monitor, is connected to the computer, the image can be displayed on the computer screen or the external display, or on both devices simultaneously. When you press fn+f4 repeatedly, the image alternates among the computer display, one or more external display devices, and simultaneously displays on all devices. Press the display switch on the computer to confirm that it moves freely. The display switch is normally located on the upper-left corner of the keyboard. If the computer has an ambient light sensor (select models only), make sure that the sensor is not obstructed. The ambient light sensor is normally located on the lower-left corner of the display. Getting Started 33 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Troubleshooting Is software functioning abnormally?

If the software becomes unresponsive or responds abnormally:

Restart the computer:

In Windows XP Home, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. In Windows XP Professional, select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart > OK. (The Turn Off Computer button may be called the Shut Down button, depending on the network connections.) If you cannot restart the computer using these procedures, refer to the next section, Is the computer unresponsive?

Run a virus scan. For information about using the antivirus resources on your computer, refer to Protect the computer from viruses in the Chapter 2, Next steps. 34 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Troubleshooting Is the computer unresponsive?

Whenever possible, turn off the computer by using the standard Windows shutdown procedure for your operating system:

Save your work and close all open applications. Shut down the computer through the operating system by selecting Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. (In Windows XP Professional, the Turn Off Computer button may be called the Shut Down button, depending on the network connections) If the system is unresponsive and you are unable to shut down the computer with these procedures, use the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved information. 1. Press ctrl+alt+delete. Then, select Shut Down > Turn Off. 2. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. 3. Disconnect the computer from external power and remove the battery pack. Getting Started 35 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Troubleshooting Is the computer overheating?

It is normal for the computer to feel warm to the touch while it is in use. But if the computer feels unusually warm, it may be overheating because a vent is blocked. If you suspect that overheating could be causing the problem, allow the computer to cool to room temperature. Then be sure to keep all vents free from obstructions while you are using the computer. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as a pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow. The fan in the computer starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 36 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Is an external device not working?

Troubleshooting If an external device does not function as expected:

Turn on the device as instructed in the device documentation. Some devices, such as monitors and printers, must be turned on before the computer is turned on. Verify that All device connections are secure. The device is receiving electrical power. The device, especially if it is an older one, is compatible with your operating system. For compatibility information, select Start > Help and Support, or visit the Web site of the device manufacturer or provider. The correct drivers are installed and updated. Drivers may be available on a CD included with the device or on the Web site of the device manufacturer. For more information about updating drivers, select Start > Help and Support. Getting Started 37 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Troubleshooting Help and Support Center To access the Help and Support Center, select Start > Help and Support. In addition to providing information about your operating system, the Help and Support Center provides Information about your computer, such as model and serial number, installed software, hardware components, and specifications. Answers to question about using your computer. Product information to help you learn to use computer and operating system features. Updates for your operating system, device drivers, and the software provided on your computer. Checkups for computer functionality. Automated and interactive troubleshooting, repair solutions, and system recovery procedures. Links to Customer Care specialists. Links to community forums of IT experts. 38 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Troubleshooting Customer Care If you are unable to find the help you need by using the Help and Support Center at Start > Help and Support, you may need to contact Customer Care. Preparing to contact Customer Care For the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the computer and the following information available when you call or e-mail:

Product name located on the display or keyboard. Serial number (s/n) listed on the service tag. The service tag label is on the bottom of the computer. To display the service tag information on the computer screen, select Start > Help and Support > My Computer. Date the computer was purchased. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. Getting Started 39 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Troubleshooting The manufacturer and model of a printer or other accessories connected to the computer. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Help and Support > My Computer. (On some models, the registration number may be identified in the Operating System table as the Product Id). Contacting Customer Care by e-mail or telephone If the computer is connected to the Internet, select Start > Help and Support to get help by e-mail or you can access Customer Care telephone numbers. 310 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppA.fm PN: HP-403067-001 A Specifications The following sections provide information on the operating environment specifications and power specifications of the computer. Operating Environment The operating environment information in the following table may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the computer in extreme environments. Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (not writing to optical disc) 0C to 35C Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 32F to 95F 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia*)

-15 m to 3,048 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia*)

-15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 40,000 ft

*Pounds per square inch absolute (psia) is another unit of measurement for altitude. Getting Started A1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppA.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Specifications Rated Input Power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the computer can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, it is strongly recommended that the computer be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power cord supplied by or approved for an HP computer. The computer is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications. Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A A2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 B System recovery Safeguarding your data Software or devices added to the computer can cause your system to become unstable. To safeguard your documents, store personal files in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the My Documents folder. Using Altiris Local Recovery (select models only) Altiris Local Recovery is a preloaded application that protects the files on your computer by storing copies of files, called snapshots. If files on your computer are accidentally deleted or corrupted, you can easily restore the files yourself. You can also restore your complete file system to a previous state. Altiris Local Recovery provides protection of files by backing up files to a hidden Altiris recovery partition. When you install the software, the Recovery Agent Partition Wizard guides you through the process of creating the recovery partition. After the partition is created, the computer restarts and creates the first snapshot. After the snapshot is created, the computer restarts, making the snapshot available for recovery through Windows. By default, Local Recovery automatically takes snapshots of your files on a regular basis. You can change the snapshot schedule. For more information, refer to the Altiris Local Recovery Help. Getting Started B1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 System recovery To access your snapshots in the Altiris Recovery Agent folder:

1. Right-click the Altiris Recovery Agent icon on your desktop. 2. Click Open. To restore one of the listed snapshots:

Drag the snapshot file to the appropriate location on your hard drive. For more information on configuring and using Altiris Local Recovery, visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy, or open the software and click Help on the menu bar. Using System Restore points System Restore is an operating system feature that allows you to reverse undesirable changes to your computer by restoring the computer to an earlier state, called a restore point. A restore point is a snapshot of your software, drivers, and operating system files at a particular time. The computer automatically creates restore points at regular intervals and may create additional restore points when you change your personal settings or add software or hardware. You can manually create additional restore points to provide increased protection for your system files and settings. It is recommended that you manually create restore points Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. Restoring to any restore point does not affect your data files. For example, restoring your system software to an earlier state will not affect documents or e-mails that you saved after that time. If you do not like the results of your restoration, you can reverse the restoration. B2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 System recovery Creating a System Restore Point To create a system restore point:

1. Click System Restore in the Help and Support Center. The System Restore window opens. 2. Click Create a restore point, and then click Next. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring to a restore point To restore the computer to a previous date and time when it was functioning optimally:

1. Click System Restore in the Help and Support Center. The System Restore window opens. 2. Click Restore my computer to an earlier time, and then click Next. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Reinstalling applications Applications preinstalled or preloaded on your computer can be reinstalled by using the Recovery disc or a third-party software disc. In most cases, the applications preloaded on your computer, such as those available in the Software Setup utility, can be reinstalled from your hard drive. To access the Software Setup utility, select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. Getting Started B3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 System recovery The application reinstallation process replaces corrupted system files within the application and reinstalls deleted system files within the application. In most cases: If the application you are reinstalling is still installed on your computer, the reinstallation process does not affect your settings within the application. In all cases: If an application has been deleted from your computer, the reinstallation process reinstalls the application or utility to the factory image but cannot restore your personal settings. Reinstalling applications from the hard drive To reinstall a preloaded application or utility from your hard drive:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup, and then follow the instructions on the screen. 2. When you are prompted to select the software you want to reinstall, select or clear the appropriate check boxes. Reinstalling applications from discs To reinstall applications from discs:

1. Insert the disc into the optical drive. 2. When the installation wizard opens, follow the installation instructions on the screen. 3. Restart the computer if prompted. B4 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 System recovery Repairing the operating system To attempt an operating system repair without deleting your personal data, use the Operating System disc that was shipped with the computer:

If your computer does not have an optical drive, you may need to connect to an optional external MultiBay. 1. Connect the computer to external power through the AC adapter and turn on the computer. 2. Immediately insert the Operating System disc into the computer. 3. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. 4. Press the power button again to turn on the computer. 5. When prompted, press any key to start from the disc. After a few minutes, you may need to select your language, and then the Setup Wizard opens. On the Welcome to Setup page, do not press R (step 8 in this procedure) until you have completed steps 6 and 7. 6. Press enter to continue. A licensing agreement page is displayed. 7. Press f8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup page is displayed. 8. Press R to repair the selected Windows installation. The repair process begins. This process takes 1 to 2 hours to complete. The computer restarts in Windows after the process is complete. Getting Started B5 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 System recovery Reinstalling the operating system CAUTION: To protect your personal information and the software installed on the computer, back up your information before reinstalling the operating system. See the Windows online Help utility to learn more about backing up your files. Type backup in the Search box in the Help and Support Center. During the reinstallation, you may be prompted for your Product Key. Your Product Key is provided on the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label on the bottom of the computer. If other recovery efforts do not successfully repair the operating system, you can reinstall it. To reinstall the operating system:

If your computer does not have an optical drive, you may need to connect to an optional external MultiBay. 1. Connect the computer to external power through the AC adapter and turn on the computer. 2. Immediately insert the Operating System disc into the computer. 3. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. 4. Press the power button again to turn on the computer. 5. When prompted, press any key to start from the disc. After a few minutes, you may need to select your language, and then the Setup Wizard opens. 6. Press enter to continue. A licensing agreement page is displayed. 7. Press f8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup page is displayed. B6 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 System recovery 8. Press esc to continue installing a new copy of the operating system instead of repairing it. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS file system

(Quick), and then press enter. Formatting this drive deletes all current files. 12. Press F to format the drive. The reinstallation process begins. This process takes 1 to 2 hours to complete. The computer restarts in Windows when the process is complete. Reinstalling device drivers and other software After the operating system installation process is complete, you must reinstall drivers. To reinstall drivers, use the Recovery disc included with the computer:

1. While running Windows, insert the Recovery disc into the optical drive. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions for installing the drivers. After the drivers are reinstalled, you must reinstall any software you added to the computer. Follow the installation instructions provided with the software. Getting Started B7 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppB.fm PN: HP-403067-001 System recovery B8 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 C Connect to the Internet from your home Your computer includes hardware and software that allows you to connect to the Internet. Before you can access the Internet, you must:

Choose an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Choose the type of Internet access you want, and connect the hardware. Internet hardware and software features vary depending on your computer model and your location. Choose an ISP You must set up Internet service before you can connect to the Internet. The computer includes the New Connection Wizard to help you set up a new Internet account or configure the computer to use an existing account. Getting Started C1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Connect to the Internet from your home Using the Internet Connection Wizard You can use the New Connection Wizard to connect to the Internet If you already have an account with an ISP. If you have a disc from an ISP. If you do not have an Internet account and would like to select an ISP from the list provided within the wizard. If you have selected an unlisted ISP and the ISP has provided you with such information as a specific IP address, and POP3 and SMTP settings. To access the New Connection Wizard and instructions for using the wizard:

Select Start > Help and Support. If you are prompted within the wizard to choose between enabling or disabling Windows Firewall, choose to enable the firewall. For more information about firewalls, refer to Protect your privacy in Chapter 2, Next steps. C2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Connect to the Internet from your home Choose the type of Internet access There are 3 basic types of Internet access:

Dial-up: You can access the Internet by dialing into a service provider using a modem cable connected to an RJ-11

(modem) jack. Broadband: High-speed Internet access is available through:

Cable modem Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Satellite Other services For broadband access, additional hardware and/or software must be provided by your ISP. Refer to Choose an ISP, or contact your ISP for details. Wireless: For high-speed mobile Internet access, you can use a wireless connection. A wireless network set up at home requires a wireless router, purchased separately. To learn about setting up wireless access, select http://www.hp.com/go/wireless. Getting Started C3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: AppC.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Connect to the Internet from your home C4 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001IX.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Index drivers, reinstalling or repairing B7 E environmental specifications A1 external devices troubleshooting 37 H hibernation 33 humidity specifications A1 I IEC 60950 compliance 24 image, switching among display devices 33 L labels Service Tag 39 lights battery 111 power/standby 114 power/standby button 114 M monitor, external 33, 37 A AC adapter connecting 111 altitude specifications A1 antivirus software 34 Application and Driver Recov-

ery disc B7 applications, reinstalling or repairing B5, B6, B7 B battery light displaying charge status 111 battery pack charging 111 C cables and cords power 32 computer viruses 34 cord, power connecting 111 D devices, external troubleshooting 37 display, switching image 33 Getting Started Index1 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001IX.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Index O operating environment specifications A1 operating system displaying version number 310 Windows reinstalling or repairing B7 Operating System disc B5, B6 overheating, computer 36 overheating, safety considerations 24 P power running the computer on battery 112 turning on computer 32 power connector 111 power cord connecting 111 power/standby light 114 power/standby lights on, off 32 printer 37 Product Id 310 product number, computer 39 R rated input power specifications A2 registration number, operating system 310 regulatory information notices 24 reinstalling or repairing software B5, B6, B7 reset (emergency shutdown) 35 S Safety and Comfort Guide 24 serial number, computer 39 Service Tag 39 snapshot B2 software antivirus 21 reinstalling or repairing B5, B6, B7 specifications operating environment A1 rated input power A2 standby 33 system lock-up 35 T temperature troubleshooting 36 temperature specifications A1 temperature, safety considerations 24 traveling with computer environmental specifications A2 troubleshooting procedures display problems 33 external device problems 37 hibernation or standby problems 33 overheating problems 36 Index2 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001IX.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Index software problems 34 virus problems 34 turning on computer 32 V vents 36 viruses, antivirus software 21 viruses, computer 34 W Wireless Regulatory Notices 24 Getting Started Index3 hp CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT Revised: 8/26/05 File: 403067-001IX.fm PN: HP-403067-001 Index Index4 Getting Started hp CONFIDENTIAL